Make stap-probe.c:stap_parse_register_operand's "regname" an std::string
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
1c82ed74 858copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1439within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1440@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1441executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1442the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1443support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1444
40b36307
L
1445@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1446@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1447When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1448symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1449This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1450when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1451to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1452This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1453libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1454
55255dae
L
1455@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1457Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1458typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1459global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1460within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1461to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1462in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1463which support shared libraries.
1464
1465The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1466scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1467
40b36307
L
1468@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1469@item --dynamic-list-data
1470Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1471
1472@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1474Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1475is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1476
0b8a70d9
L
1477@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1479Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1480
252b5132
RH
1481@kindex --check-sections
1482@kindex --no-check-sections
1483@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1484@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1485Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1486been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1487perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1488suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1489allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1490restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1491Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1492force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1493option.
252b5132 1494
ddbb8a31
NC
1495@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1496@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1497@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1498@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1499This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1500by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1501command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1502output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1503input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1504specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1505follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1506behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1507
1508This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1509libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1510mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1511their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1512required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1513the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1514dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1515symbols.
1516
252b5132
RH
1517@cindex cross reference table
1518@kindex --cref
1519@item --cref
1520Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1521generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1522Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1523
1524The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1525easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1526sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1527symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1528definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1529where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1530symbol are listed.
252b5132 1531
4818e05f
AM
1532@cindex common allocation
1533@kindex --no-define-common
1534@item --no-define-common
1535This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1536The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1537@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1538
1539The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1540the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1541of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1542forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1543Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1544from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1545This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1546and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1547duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1548paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1549
7bdf4127
AB
1550@cindex group allocation in linker script
1551@cindex section groups
1552@cindex COMDAT
1553@kindex --force-group-allocation
1554@item --force-group-allocation
1555This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1556normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1557default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1558change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1559command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1560effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1561
252b5132 1562@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1563@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1564@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1565Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1566address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1567times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1568limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1569context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1570symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1571constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1572using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1573@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1574equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1575
1576@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1577@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1578@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1579@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1580@itemx --no-demangle
1581These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1582and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1583present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1584underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1585mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1586different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1587to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1588demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1589is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1590
1591@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1592@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1594@item -I@var{file}
1595@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1596Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1597generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1598linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1599doing.
1600
9b8b325a
RF
1601@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1602@item --no-dynamic-linker
1603When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1604linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1605executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1606entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1607
a70f34c0
NC
1608@kindex --embedded-relocs
1609@item --embedded-relocs
1610This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1611that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1612is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1613targets.
1614
3f0a5f17
ME
1615@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1617Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1618in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1619
7ce691ae 1620@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1621@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1622@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1623@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1624Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1625with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1626
252b5132
RH
1627@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1628@item --force-exe-suffix
1629Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1630
1631If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1632@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1633the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1634option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1635Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1636it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1637
1638@kindex --gc-sections
1639@kindex --no-gc-sections
1640@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1641@item --gc-sections
1642@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1643Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1644targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1645performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1646@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1647collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1648implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1649
d5465ba2
AM
1650@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1651examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1652symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1653command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1654referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1655libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1656referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1657the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1658relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1659@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1660
ac69cbc6 1661This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1662@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1663specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1664@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1665command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1666
c17d87de
NC
1667@kindex --print-gc-sections
1668@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1669@cindex garbage collection
1670@item --print-gc-sections
1671@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1672List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1673printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1674collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1675default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1676be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1677line.
1678
22185505 1679@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1680@cindex garbage collection
1681@item --gc-keep-exported
1682When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1683collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1684default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1685executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1686collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1687Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1688it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1689ELF format targets.
1690
30824704
RM
1691@kindex --print-output-format
1692@cindex output format
1693@item --print-output-format
1694Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1695other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1696in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1697
3604cb1f
TG
1698@kindex --print-memory-usage
1699@cindex memory usage
1700@item --print-memory-usage
1701Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1702the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1703quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1704headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1705parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1706
1707@smallexample
1708Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1709 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1710 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1711@end smallexample
1712
252b5132
RH
1713@cindex help
1714@cindex usage
1715@kindex --help
1716@item --help
1717Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1718
ea20a7da
CC
1719@kindex --target-help
1720@item --target-help
a094d01f 1721Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1722
2509a395
SL
1723@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1725Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1726@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1727
1728@cindex memory usage
1729@kindex --no-keep-memory
1730@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1731@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1732symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1733instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1734necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1735while linking a large executable.
1736
1737@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1738@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1739@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1740@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1741@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1742Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1743is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1744The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1745behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1746libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1747
97a232d7
NC
1748The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1749
aa713662
L
1750@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1751@kindex -z muldefs
1752@item --allow-multiple-definition
1753@itemx -z muldefs
1754Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1755report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1756first definition will be used.
1757
b79e8c78 1758@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1759@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1760@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1761@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1762Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1763This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1764determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1765shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1766how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1767
903249d7
NC
1768The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1769referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1770an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1771a shared library.
1772
1773The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1774libraries specified at link time are that:
1775
1776@itemize @bullet
1777@item
1778A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1779that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1780resolvable at load time.
1781@item
1782There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1783symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1784
1785The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1786select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1787architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1788appropriate memset function.
1789@end itemize
b79e8c78 1790
31941635
L
1791@kindex --no-undefined-version
1792@item --no-undefined-version
1793Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1794it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1795will be issued instead.
1796
3e3b46e5
PB
1797@kindex --default-symver
1798@item --default-symver
1799Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1800exported symbols.
1801
1802@kindex --default-imported-symver
1803@item --default-imported-symver
1804Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1805imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1806
252b5132
RH
1807@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1808@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1809Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1810files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1811been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1812This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1813errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1814have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1815inappropriate.
1816
fe7929ce
AM
1817@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1819Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1820library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1821
252b5132
RH
1822@kindex --no-whole-archive
1823@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1824Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1825archive files.
1826
1827@cindex output file after errors
1828@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1829@item --noinhibit-exec
1830Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1831Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1832errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1833when it issues any error whatsoever.
1834
0a9c1c8e
CD
1835@kindex -nostdlib
1836@item -nostdlib
1837Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1838command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1839(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1840
252b5132 1841@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1842@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1844@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1845file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1846@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1847object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1848object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1849should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1850usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1851name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1852list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1853command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1854this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1855@end ifclear
1856
76359541
TP
1857@kindex --out-implib
1858@item --out-implib @var{file}
1859Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1860the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1861library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1862may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1863behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1864step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1865the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1866
36af4a4e
JJ
1867@kindex -pie
1868@kindex --pic-executable
1869@item -pie
1870@itemx --pic-executable
1871@cindex position independent executables
1872Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1873ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1874libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1875address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1876normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1877defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1878
252b5132
RH
1879@kindex -qmagic
1880@item -qmagic
1881This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1882
1883@kindex -Qy
1884@item -Qy
1885This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1886
1887@kindex --relax
1888@cindex synthesizing linker
1889@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1890@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1891@item --relax
28d5f677 1892@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1893An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1894@ifset GENERIC
1895This option is only supported on a few targets.
1896@end ifset
1897@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1898@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1899@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1900@ifset XTENSA
1901@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1902@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1903@ifset M68HC11
1904@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1905@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1906@ifset NIOSII
1907@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1908@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1909@ifset POWERPC
1910@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1911@end ifset
252b5132 1912
a094d01f 1913On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1914global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1915addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1916synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1917instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1918
1919On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1920debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1921@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1922This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1923family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1924@end ifset
1925
1926@ifset GENERIC
1927On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1928but ignored.
1929@end ifset
1930
28d5f677
NC
1931On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1932@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1933
252b5132
RH
1934@cindex retaining specified symbols
1935@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1936@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1937@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1939Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1940discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1941symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1942@ifset GENERIC
1943(such as VxWorks)
1944@end ifset
1945where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1946run-time memory.
1947
1948@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1949or symbols needed for relocations.
1950
1951You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1952line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1953
1954@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1955@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1956@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1957@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1958Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1959linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1960arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1961them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1962also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1963objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1964@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1965ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1966@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1967
ff5dcc92 1968The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1969SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1970@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1971runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1972options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1973gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1974file systems.
252b5132 1975
ff5dcc92 1976For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1977followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1978the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1979@end ifset
1980
1981@ifset GENERIC
1982@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1983@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1985When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1986happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1987of the input files.
1988
1989When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1990non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1991shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1992explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1993specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1994@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1995either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1996appearing multiple times.
1997
e680a6b6
NC
1998The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1999directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2000containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2001and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2003
2004The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2005@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2006supported.
2007
28c309a2
NC
2008This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2009that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2010is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2011runtime linker would do.
2012
252b5132 2013The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2014libraries:
252b5132
RH
2015@enumerate
2016@item
ff5dcc92 2017Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2018@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2019Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2020between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2021specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2022used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2023at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2024by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2025the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2026@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2027On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2028@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2029environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2030@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2031On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2032directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2033@item
a1b8d843 2034For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2035variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2036@item
ec4eb78a
L
2037For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2038@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2039libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2040@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2041@item
252b5132
RH
2042The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2043@item
2044For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2045exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2046@end enumerate
2047
2048If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2049warning and continue with the link.
2050@end ifset
2051
2052@kindex -shared
2053@kindex -Bshareable
2054@item -shared
2055@itemx -Bshareable
2056@cindex shared libraries
2057Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2058and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2059shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2060undefined symbols in the link.
2061
252b5132 2062@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2063@item --sort-common
2064@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2065@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2066This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2067ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2068sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2069eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2070between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2071specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2072
2509a395
SL
2073@kindex --sort-section=name
2074@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2075This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2076patterns in the linker script.
2077
2509a395
SL
2078@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2079@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2080This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2081patterns in the linker script.
2082
a70f34c0
NC
2083@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2084@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2085This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2086.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2087post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2088
252b5132 2089@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2090@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2091Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2092each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2093size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2094
2095@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2096@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2097Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2098output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2099This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2100certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2101cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2102that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2103support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2104input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2105more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2106many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2107
2108@kindex --stats
2109@item --stats
2110Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2111as execution time and memory usage.
2112
2509a395 2113@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2114@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2115Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2116configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2117that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2118
a70f34c0
NC
2119@kindex --task-link
2120@item --task-link
2121This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2122file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2123
252b5132
RH
2124@kindex --traditional-format
2125@cindex traditional format
2126@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2127For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2128the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2129use the traditional format instead.
2130
2131@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2132For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2133symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2134full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2135@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2136trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2137combine duplicate entries.
2138
2509a395
SL
2139@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2141Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2142address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2143times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2144line.
2145@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2146for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2147@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2148should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2149sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2150
2509a395
SL
2151@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2152@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2153@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2154@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2155@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2156@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2157@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2158Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2159@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2160
2509a395
SL
2161@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2163@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2164When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2165byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2166
9d5777a3
RM
2167@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2169@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2170When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2171the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2172text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2173
0d705e9f
AM
2174@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2176@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2177When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2178model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2179
560e09e9
NC
2180@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2181@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2182Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2183values for @samp{method}:
2184
2185@table @samp
2186@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2187Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2188
2189@item report-all
da8bce14 2190Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2191
2192@item ignore-in-object-files
2193Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2194ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2195
2196@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2197Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2198ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2199when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2200libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2201command line.
2202@end table
2203
2204The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2205by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2206
2207Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2208unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2209can change this to a warning.
2210
1715a13c
L
2211@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2213@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2214@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2215Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2216supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2217the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2218argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2221@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2222@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2223Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2224used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2225about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2226is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2227see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2228use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2229symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2230@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2231
7ce691ae 2232@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2233@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2234@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2235@item --warn-common
2236Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2237a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2238but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2239you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2240Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2241warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2242
2243There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2244
2245@table @samp
2246@item int i = 1;
2247A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2248file.
2249
2250@item extern int i;
2251An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2252There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2253variable somewhere.
2254
2255@item int i;
2256A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2257variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2258The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2259single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2260size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2261a definition of the same variable.
2262@end table
2263
2264The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2265Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2266just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2267encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2268a common symbol.
2269
2270@enumerate
2271@item
2272Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2273definition for the symbol.
2274@smallexample
2275@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2276 overridden by definition
2277@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2278@end smallexample
2279
2280@item
2281Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2282the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2283except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2284@smallexample
2285@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2286 overriding common
2287@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2288@end smallexample
2289
2290@item
2291Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2292@smallexample
2293@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2294 of `@var{symbol}'
2295@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2296@end smallexample
2297
2298@item
2299Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2300@smallexample
2301@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2302 overridden by larger common
2303@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2304@end smallexample
2305
2306@item
2307Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2308the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2309encountered in a different order.
2310@smallexample
2311@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2312 overriding smaller common
2313@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2314@end smallexample
2315@end enumerate
2316
2317@kindex --warn-constructors
2318@item --warn-constructors
2319Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2320object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2321detect the use of global constructors.
2322
2323@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2324@item --warn-multiple-gp
2325Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2326This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2327Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2328section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2329of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2330base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2331base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2332bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2333large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2334values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2335option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2336
2337@kindex --warn-once
2338@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2339@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2340@item --warn-once
2341Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2342which refers to it.
2343
2344@kindex --warn-section-align
2345@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2346@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2347@item --warn-section-align
2348Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2349alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2350The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2351is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2352the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2353
8fdd7217
NC
2354@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2355@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2356Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2357
a0c402a5
L
2358@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2359@item --warn-alternate-em
2360Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2361
560e09e9
NC
2362@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2364If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2365@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2366This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2367
2368@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2369@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2370This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2371it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2372
252b5132
RH
2373@kindex --whole-archive
2374@cindex including an entire archive
2375@item --whole-archive
2376For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2377@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2378in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2379files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2380library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2381library. This option may be used more than once.
2382
7ec229ce 2383Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2384about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2385Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2386list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2387your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2388
2509a395
SL
2389@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2391Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2392@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2393undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2394@var{symbol}.
2395
2396This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2397wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2398wishes to call the system function, it should call
2399@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2400
2401Here is a trivial example:
2402
2403@smallexample
2404void *
cc2f008e 2405__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2406@{
cc2f008e 2407 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2408 return __real_malloc (c);
2409@}
2410@end smallexample
2411
ff5dcc92 2412If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2413all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2414instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2415call the real @code{malloc} function.
2416
2417You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2418links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2419you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2420file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2421call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2422
4ea904ed
SH
2423Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2424internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2425@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2426@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2427
2428@smallexample
2429int
2430f (void)
2431@{
2432 return 123;
2433@}
2434
2435int
2436g (void)
2437@{
2438 return f();
2439@}
2440@end smallexample
2441
6aa29e7b 2442@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2443@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2444@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2445@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2446Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2447(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2448section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2449
e41b3a13
JJ
2450@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2451@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2452Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2453generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2454if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2455
6c1439be
L
2456@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2457@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2458@item --enable-new-dtags
2459@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2460This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2461systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2462@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2463and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2464If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2465created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2466those options are only available for ELF systems.
2467
2d643429 2468@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2469@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2470Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2471close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2472time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2473increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2474value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2475
fdc90cb4
JJ
2476@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2477@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2478Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2479@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2480new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2481the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2482hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2483but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2484
0ce398f1
L
2485@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2486@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2487@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2488@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2489@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2490@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2491@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2492@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2493On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2494compressed using zlib.
2495
2496@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2497sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2498DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2499instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2500also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2501sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2502
2503The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2504@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2505
2506Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2507sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2508for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2509uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2510
2511The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2512involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2513default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2514@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2515
35835446
JR
2516@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2517@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2518This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2519linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2520for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2521about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2522
4f9c04f7 2523Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25241021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2525run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2526has been used.
2527
2528The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2529enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2530
c0065db7
RM
2531@kindex --build-id
2532@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2533@item --build-id
2534@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2535Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2536or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2537unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2538@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2539@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2540@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2541the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2542string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2543@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2544is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2545
2546The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2547that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2548unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2549to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2550file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2551string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2552
2553Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2554@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2555@end table
2556
0285c67d
NC
2557@c man end
2558
36f63dca 2559@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2560
0285c67d
NC
2561@c man begin OPTIONS
2562
ff5dcc92 2563The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2564the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2565normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2566use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2567@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2568like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2569symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2570object file).
2571
2572In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2573support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2574PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2575values by either a space or an equals sign.
2576
ff5dcc92 2577@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2578
2579@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2580@item --add-stdcall-alias
2581If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2582as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2584
2585@kindex --base-file
2586@item --base-file @var{file}
2587Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2588addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2589@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2590[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2591
2592@kindex --dll
2593@item --dll
2594Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2595@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2596file.
bb10df36 2597[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2598
88183869
DK
2599@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2600@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2601@item --enable-long-section-names
2602@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2603The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2604the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2605for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2606fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2607to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2608allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2609disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2610generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2611as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2612with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2613GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2614information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2615option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2616section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2617when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2618image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2619[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2620
252b5132
RH
2621@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2622@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2623@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2624@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2625If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2626do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2627only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2628resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2629undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2630@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2631to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2632warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2633import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2634to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2635feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2636@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2637mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2638[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2639
522f09cd
KT
2640@kindex --leading-underscore
2641@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2642@item --leading-underscore
2643@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2644For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2645in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2646disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2647
252b5132
RH
2648@cindex DLLs, creating
2649@kindex --export-all-symbols
2650@item --export-all-symbols
2651If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2652be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2653otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2654explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2655attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2656option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2657@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2658@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2659exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2660re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2661such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2662@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2663@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2664Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2665not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2666extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2667(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2668These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2669@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2670@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2671@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2672@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2674
2675@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2676@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2677Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2678exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2679[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2680
2927aaca
NC
2681@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2682@item --exclude-all-symbols
2683Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2685
252b5132
RH
2686@kindex --file-alignment
2687@item --file-alignment
2688Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2689file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2690512.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@cindex heap size
2694@kindex --heap
2695@item --heap @var{reserve}
2696@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2697Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2698to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2699committed.
bb10df36 2700[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2701
2702@cindex image base
2703@kindex --image-base
2704@item --image-base @var{value}
2705Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2706the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2707is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2708your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2709other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2710for dlls.
bb10df36 2711[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2712
2713@kindex --kill-at
2714@item --kill-at
2715If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2716symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2717[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2718
26d2d8a2
BF
2719@kindex --large-address-aware
2720@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2721If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2722header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2723greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2724or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2725section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2726[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2727
f69a2f97
NC
2728@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2729@item --disable-large-address-aware
2730Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2731This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2732driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2733addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2734[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2735
252b5132
RH
2736@kindex --major-image-version
2737@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2738Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2740
2741@kindex --major-os-version
2742@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2743Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2744[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2745
2746@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2747@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2748Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2749[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2750
2751@kindex --minor-image-version
2752@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2753Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@kindex --minor-os-version
2757@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2758Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2762@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2763Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2765
2766@cindex DEF files, creating
2767@cindex DLLs, creating
2768@kindex --output-def
2769@item --output-def @var{file}
2770The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2771file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2772(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2773library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2774automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2775[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2776
b044cda1 2777@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2778@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2779@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2780@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2781Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2782@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2783By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2784for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2785execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2786[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2787
2788@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2789@item --disable-auto-image-base
2790Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2791user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2792default.
bb10df36 2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2794
2795@cindex DLLs, linking to
2796@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2797@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2798When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2799search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2800@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2801between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2802uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2803@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2804[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2805
2806@kindex --enable-auto-import
2807@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2808Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2809DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2810mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2811[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2812
2813The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2814feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2815
2816Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2817of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2818PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2819
e2a83dd0
NC
2820Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2821data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2822placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2823around a problem with consts that is described here:
2824http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2825
4d8907ac
DS
2826Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2827see this message:
0d888aac 2828
ece2d90e 2829"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2830documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2831
ece2d90e
NC
2832This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2833ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2834allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2835fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2836constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2837multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2838this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2839of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2840the warning, and exit.
2841
2842There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2843data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2844
2fa9fc65
NC
2845One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2846of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2847this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2848
c0065db7
RM
2849A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2850that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2851there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2852a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2853
2854@example
2855extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2856extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2857 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2858@end example
2859
2860or
2861
2862@example
2863extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2864extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2865 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2866@end example
2867
c0065db7 2868For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2869is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2870
2871@example
2872extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2873extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2874 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2875@end example
2876
c406afaf
NC
2877or
2878
2879@example
2880extern long long extern_ll;
2881extern_ll -->
2882 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2883@end example
2884
2fa9fc65 2885A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2886'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2887@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2888requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2889building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2890merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2891between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2892constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2893
2894Original:
2895@example
2896--foo.h
2897extern int arr[];
2898--foo.c
2899#include "foo.h"
2900void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2901 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2902@}
2903@end example
2904
2905Solution 1:
2906@example
2907--foo.h
2908extern int arr[];
2909--foo.c
2910#include "foo.h"
2911void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2912 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2913 volatile int *parr = arr;
2914 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2915@}
2916@end example
2917
2918Solution 2:
2919@example
2920--foo.h
2921/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2922#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2923 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2924#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2925#else
2926#define FOO_IMPORT
2927#endif
2928extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2929--foo.c
2930#include "foo.h"
2931void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2932 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2933@}
2934@end example
2935
c0065db7 2936A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2937library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2938for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2939functions).
b044cda1
CW
2940
2941@kindex --disable-auto-import
2942@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2943Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2944@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2945[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2946
2fa9fc65
NC
2947@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2949If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2950that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2951a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2952environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2953[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2954
2955@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2957Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2958[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2959
b044cda1
CW
2960@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2962Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2963[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2964
252b5132
RH
2965@kindex --section-alignment
2966@item --section-alignment
2967Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2968addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2969[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2970
2971@cindex stack size
2972@kindex --stack
2973@item --stack @var{reserve}
2974@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2975Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2976to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2977committed.
bb10df36 2978[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2979
2980@kindex --subsystem
2981@item --subsystem @var{which}
2982@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2983@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2984Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2985legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2986@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2987the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2988@var{which}.
bb10df36 2989[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2990
2f563b51
DK
2991The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2992of the PE file header:
2993[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2994
2d5c3743
NC
2995@kindex --high-entropy-va
2996@item --high-entropy-va
2997Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2998(ASLR).
2999
2f563b51
DK
3000@kindex --dynamicbase
3001@item --dynamicbase
3002The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3003randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3004Vista for i386 PE targets.
3005
3006@kindex --forceinteg
3007@item --forceinteg
3008Code integrity checks are enforced.
3009
3010@kindex --nxcompat
3011@item --nxcompat
3012The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3013This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3014
3015@kindex --no-isolation
3016@item --no-isolation
3017Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3018
3019@kindex --no-seh
3020@item --no-seh
3021The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3022this image.
3023
3024@kindex --no-bind
3025@item --no-bind
3026Do not bind this image.
3027
3028@kindex --wdmdriver
3029@item --wdmdriver
3030The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3031
2f563b51
DK
3032@kindex --tsaware
3033@item --tsaware
3034The image is Terminal Server aware.
3035
0cb112f7
CF
3036@kindex --insert-timestamp
3037@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3038@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3039Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3040as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3041other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3042will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3043same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3044can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3045that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3046identically.
252b5132
RH
3047@end table
3048
0285c67d
NC
3049@c man end
3050
ac145307
BS
3051@ifset C6X
3052@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3053
3054@c man begin OPTIONS
3055
3056The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3057libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3058all executables use an index of 0.
3059
3060@table @gcctabopt
3061
3062@kindex --dsbt-size
3063@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3064This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3065or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3066entries.
3067
3068@kindex --dsbt-index
3069@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3070This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3071to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3072executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3073@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3074
fbd9ad90
PB
3075@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3076The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3077exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3078
ac145307
BS
3079@end table
3080
3081@c man end
3082@end ifset
3083
b8891f8d
AJ
3084@ifset CSKY
3085@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3086
3087@c man begin OPTIONS
3088
3089@table @gcctabopt
3090
3091@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3092@item --branch-stub
3093This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3094sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3095usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3096can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3097the compiler or assembler.
3098
3099@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3100@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3101This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3102It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3103be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3104stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3105sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3106@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3107linker should choose suitable defaults.
3108
3109@end table
3110
3111@c man end
3112@end ifset
3113
93fd0973
SC
3114@ifset M68HC11
3115@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3116
3117@c man begin OPTIONS
3118
3119The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3120memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3121
3122@table @gcctabopt
3123
3124@kindex --no-trampoline
3125@item --no-trampoline
3126This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3127is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3128instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3129
3130@kindex --bank-window
3131@item --bank-window @var{name}
3132This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3133the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3134The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3135paging and addresses within the memory window.
3136
3137@end table
3138
3139@c man end
3140@end ifset
3141
7fb9f789
NC
3142@ifset M68K
3143@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3144
3145@c man begin OPTIONS
3146
3147The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3148when linking for 68K targets.
3149
3150@table @gcctabopt
3151
3152@kindex --got
3153@item --got=@var{type}
3154This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3155@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3156@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3157Info entry for @file{ld}.
3158
3159@end table
3160
3161@c man end
3162@end ifset
3163
833794fc
MR
3164@ifset MIPS
3165@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3166
3167@c man begin OPTIONS
3168
3169The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3170generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3171linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3172
3173@table @gcctabopt
3174
3175@kindex --insn32
3176@item --insn32
3177@kindex --no-insn32
3178@itemx --no-insn32
3179These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3180generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3181or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318232-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3183used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3184possible.
3185
8b10b0b3
MR
3186@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3187@item --ignore-branch-isa
3188@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3190These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3191transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3192accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3193is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3194instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3195equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3196calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3197a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3198an error.
3199
833794fc
MR
3200@end table
3201
3202@c man end
3203@end ifset
3204
252b5132
RH
3205@ifset UsesEnvVars
3206@node Environment
3207@section Environment Variables
3208
0285c67d
NC
3209@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3210
560e09e9 3211You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3212@ifclear SingleFormat
3213@code{GNUTARGET},
3214@end ifclear
3215@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3216
36f63dca 3217@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3218@kindex GNUTARGET
3219@cindex default input format
3220@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3221use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3222of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3223@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3224of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3225attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3226this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3227there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3228object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3229BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3230in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3231@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3232
3233@kindex LDEMULATION
3234@cindex default emulation
3235@cindex emulation, default
3236@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3237@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3238behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3239available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3240the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3241variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3242linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3243
3244@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3245@cindex demangling, default
3246Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3247@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3248default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3249a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3250may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3251options.
3252
0285c67d
NC
3253@c man end
3254@end ifset
3255
252b5132
RH
3256@node Scripts
3257@chapter Linker Scripts
3258
3259@cindex scripts
3260@cindex linker scripts
3261@cindex command files
3262Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3263written in the linker command language.
3264
3265The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3266the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3267the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3268more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3269direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3270described below.
3271
3272The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3273yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3274linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3275to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3276such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3277
3278You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3279line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3280default linker script.
3281
3282You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3283to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3284Linker Scripts}.
3285
3286@menu
3287* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3288* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3289* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3290* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3291* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3292* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3293* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3294* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3295* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3296* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3297* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3298@end menu
3299
3300@node Basic Script Concepts
3301@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3302@cindex linker script concepts
3303We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3304describe the linker script language.
3305
3306The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3307file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3308@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3309The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3310purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3311among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3312section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3313in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3314
3315Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3316also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3317contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3318the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3319A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3320area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3321loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3322which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3323of debugging information.
3324
3325Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3326first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3327the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3328@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3329section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3330same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3331is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3332(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3333based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3334RAM address would be the VMA.
3335
3336You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3337program with the @samp{-h} option.
3338
3339Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3340@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3341has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3342information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3343will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3344static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3345referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3346
3347You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3348program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3349option.
3350
3351@node Script Format
3352@section Linker Script Format
3353@cindex linker script format
3354Linker scripts are text files.
3355
3356You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3357either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3358symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3359generally ignored.
3360
3361Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3362If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3363otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3364double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3365file name.
3366
3367You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3368@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3369to whitespace.
3370
3371@node Simple Example
3372@section Simple Linker Script Example
3373@cindex linker script example
3374@cindex example of linker script
3375Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3376
3377The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3378@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3379memory layout of the output file.
3380
3381The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3382describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3383code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3384@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3385Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3386your input files.
3387
3388For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33890x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3390linker script which will do that:
3391@smallexample
3392SECTIONS
3393@{
3394 . = 0x10000;
3395 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3396 . = 0x8000000;
3397 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3398 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3399@}
3400@end smallexample
3401
3402You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3403followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3404descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3405
252b5132
RH
3406The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3407sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3408counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3409other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3410current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3411incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3412@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3413
3414The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3415required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3416after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3417which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3418wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3419means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3420
3421Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3422@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3423@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3424
3425The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3426the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3427at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3428output section, the value of the location counter will be
3429@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3430effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3431immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3432
3433The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3434alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3435example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3436sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3437may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3438sections.
3439
3440That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3441
3442@node Simple Commands
3443@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3444@cindex linker script simple commands
3445In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3446
3447@menu
3448* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3449* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3450@ifclear SingleFormat
3451* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3452@end ifclear
3453
4a93e180 3454* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3455* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3456@end menu
3457
3458@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3459@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3460@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3461@cindex start of execution
3462@cindex first instruction
3463@cindex entry point
3464The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3465point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3466entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3467@smallexample
3468ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3469@end smallexample
3470
3471There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3472entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3473stopping when one of them succeeds:
3474@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3475@item
252b5132 3476the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3477@item
252b5132 3478the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3479@item
a094d01f 3480the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3481targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3482check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3483@item
252b5132 3484the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3485@item
252b5132
RH
3486The address @code{0}.
3487@end itemize
3488
3489@node File Commands
36f63dca 3490@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3491@cindex linker script file commands
3492Several linker script commands deal with files.
3493
3494@table @code
3495@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3496@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3497@cindex including a linker script
3498Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3499be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3500with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
350110 levels deep.
3502
4006703d
NS
3503You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3504@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3505
252b5132
RH
3506@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3507@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3508@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3509@cindex input files in linker scripts
3510@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3511@cindex linker script input object files
3512The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3513in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3514
3515For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3516a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3517then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3518
3519In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3520script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3521
e3f2db7f
AO
3522In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3523with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3524located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3525for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3526open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3527linker will search through the archive library search path.
3528The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3529as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3530path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3531@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3532
ff5dcc92 3533If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3534name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3535@samp{-l}.
3536
3537When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3538files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3539script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3540
3541@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3542@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3543@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3544@cindex grouping input files
3545The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3546files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3547new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3548in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3549
b717d30e
JJ
3550@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3551@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3552@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3553This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3554commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3555as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3556with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3557when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3558@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3559and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3560setting afterwards.
3561
252b5132
RH
3562@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3563@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3564@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3565The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3566@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3567@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3568Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3569precedence.
3570
3571You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3572output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3573
3574@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3575@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3576@cindex library search path in linker script
3577@cindex archive search path in linker script
3578@cindex search path in linker script
3579The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3580@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3581@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3582on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3583are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3584the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3585
3586@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3587@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3588@cindex first input file
3589The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3590that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3591though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3592when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3593first file.
3594@end table
3595
3596@ifclear SingleFormat
3597@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3598@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3599A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3600
3601@table @code
3602@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3603@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3604@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3605@cindex output file format in linker script
3606The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3607output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3608exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3609(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3610line option takes precedence.
3611
3612You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3613formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3614This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3615desired endianness.
3616
3617If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3618will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3619output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3620used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3621
3622For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3623command:
3624@smallexample
3625OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3626@end smallexample
3627This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3628@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3629option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3630format.
3631
3632@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3633@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3634@cindex input file format in linker script
3635The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3636files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3637This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3638(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3639is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3640command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3641@end table
3642@end ifclear
3643
4a93e180
NC
3644@node REGION_ALIAS
3645@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3646@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3647@cindex region alias
3648@cindex region names
3649
3650Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3651@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3652
3653@smallexample
3654REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3655@end smallexample
3656
3657The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3658memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3659to memory regions. An example follows.
3660
3661Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3662memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3663that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3664non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3665access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3666read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3667sections:
3668
3669@itemize @bullet
3670@item
3671@code{.text} program code;
3672@item
3673@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3674@item
3675@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3676@item
3677@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3678@end itemize
3679
3680The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3681part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3682output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3683systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3684@code{C}:
3685@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3686@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3687@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3688@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3689@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3690@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3691@end multitable
3692The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3693loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3694the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3695the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3696
3697The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3698includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3699memory layout:
3700@smallexample
3701INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3702
3703SECTIONS
3704 @{
3705 .text :
3706 @{
3707 *(.text)
3708 @} > REGION_TEXT
3709 .rodata :
3710 @{
3711 *(.rodata)
3712 rodata_end = .;
3713 @} > REGION_RODATA
3714 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3715 @{
3716 data_start = .;
3717 *(.data)
3718 @} > REGION_DATA
3719 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3720 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3721 .bss :
3722 @{
3723 *(.bss)
3724 @} > REGION_BSS
3725 @}
3726@end smallexample
3727
3728Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3729regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3730variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3731@table @code
3732@item A
3733Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3734@smallexample
3735MEMORY
3736 @{
3737 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3738 @}
3739
3740REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3741REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3742REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3743REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3744@end smallexample
3745@item B
3746Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3747into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3748@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3749@smallexample
3750MEMORY
3751 @{
3752 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3753 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3754 @}
3755
3756REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3757REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3758REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3759REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3760@end smallexample
3761@item C
3762Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3763@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3764initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3765system start into the @code{RAM}.
3766@smallexample
3767MEMORY
3768 @{
3769 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3770 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3771 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3772 @}
3773
3774REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3775REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3776REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3777REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3778@end smallexample
3779@end table
3780
3781It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3782@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3783necessary:
3784@smallexample
3785#include <string.h>
3786
3787extern char data_start [];
3788extern char data_size [];
3789extern char data_load_start [];
3790
3791void copy_data(void)
3792@{
3793 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3794 @{
3795 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3796 @}
3797@}
3798@end smallexample
3799
252b5132 3800@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3801@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3802There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3803
3804@table @code
3805@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3806@kindex ASSERT
3807@cindex assertion in linker script
3808Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3809with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3810
fd1c4238
NC
3811Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3812take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3813inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3814for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3815symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3816
3817@smallexample
3818 .stack :
3819 @{
3820 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3821 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3822 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3823 @}
3824@end smallexample
3825
3826will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3827PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3828can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3829
3830@smallexample
3831 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3832 .stack :
3833 @{
3834 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3835 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3836 @}
3837@end smallexample
3838
3839will work.
3840
252b5132
RH
3841@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3842@kindex EXTERN
3843@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3844Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3845symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3846modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3847each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3848command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3849
3850@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3851@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3852@cindex common allocation in linker script
3853This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3854to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3855output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3856
4818e05f
AM
3857@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3859@cindex common allocation in linker script
3860This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3861command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3862to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3863
7bdf4127
AB
3864@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3865@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3866@cindex group allocation in linker script
3867@cindex section groups
3868@cindex COMDAT
3869This command has the same effect as the
3870@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3871@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3872and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3873specified (@samp{-r}).
3874
53d25da6
AM
3875@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3876@kindex INSERT
3877@cindex insert user script into default script
3878This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3879augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3880inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3881@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3882default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3883sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3884linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3885insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3886linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3887default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3888of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3889to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3890is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3891
3892@smallexample
3893SECTIONS
3894@{
3895 OVERLAY :
3896 @{
3897 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3898 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3899 @}
3900@}
3901INSERT AFTER .text;
3902@end smallexample
3903
252b5132
RH
3904@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3905@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3906@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3907This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3908references among certain output sections.
3909
3910In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3911using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3912will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3913errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3914a function defined in the other section.
3915
3916The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3917@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3918an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3919@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3920names.
3921
cdf96953
MF
3922@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3923@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3924@cindex cross references
3925This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3926references to one section from a list of other sections.
3927
3928The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3929output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3930a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3931there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3932must never call back.
3933
3934The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3935The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3936If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3937the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3938status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3939names, not input section names.
3940
252b5132
RH
3941@ifclear SingleFormat
3942@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3943@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3944@cindex machine architecture
3945@cindex architecture
3946Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3947of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3948architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3949the @samp{-f} option.
3950@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3951
3952@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3953@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3954This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3955@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3956in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3957@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3958@end table
3959
3960@node Assignments
3961@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3962@cindex assignment in scripts
3963@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3964@cindex variables, defining
3965You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3966the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3967
3968@menu
3969* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3970* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3971* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3972* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3973* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3974@end menu
3975
3976@node Simple Assignments
3977@subsection Simple Assignments
3978
3979You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3980
3981@table @code
3982@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3983@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3984@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3985@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3986@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3987@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3988@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3989@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3990@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3991@end table
3992
3993The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3994@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3995defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3996
3997The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3998may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3999
4000The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4001
4002Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4003
4004You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4005statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4006section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4007
4008The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4009expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4010
4011Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4012assignments may be used:
4013
4014@smallexample
4015floating_point = 0;
4016SECTIONS
4017@{
4018 .text :
4019 @{
4020 *(.text)
4021 _etext = .;
4022 @}
156e34dd 4023 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4024 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4025@}
4026@end smallexample
4027@noindent
4028In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4029zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4030the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4031defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4032upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4033
eb8476a6
MR
4034@node HIDDEN
4035@subsection HIDDEN
4036@cindex HIDDEN
4037For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4038exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4039
4040Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4041@code{HIDDEN}:
4042
4043@smallexample
4044HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4045SECTIONS
4046@{
4047 .text :
4048 @{
4049 *(.text)
4050 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4051 @}
4052 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4053 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4054@}
4055@end smallexample
4056@noindent
4057In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4058
252b5132
RH
4059@node PROVIDE
4060@subsection PROVIDE
4061@cindex PROVIDE
4062In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4063only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4064the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4065@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4066@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4067@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4068@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4069@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4070
4071Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4072@smallexample
4073SECTIONS
4074@{
4075 .text :
4076 @{
4077 *(.text)
4078 _etext = .;
4079 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4080 @}
4081@}
4082@end smallexample
4083
4084In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4085underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4086the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4087underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4088If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4089linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4090
b0daac83
NC
4091Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4092defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4093that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4094when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4095@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4096
7af8e998
L
4097@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4098@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4099@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4100Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4101hidden and won't be exported.
4102
73ae6183
NC
4103@node Source Code Reference
4104@subsection Source Code Reference
4105
4106Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4107intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4108a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4109symbol that does not have a value.
4110
4111Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4112transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4113stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4114prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4115mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4116of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4117variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4118linker script variable might be referred to as:
4119
4120@smallexample
4121 extern int foo;
4122@end smallexample
4123
4124But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4125
4126@smallexample
4127 _foo = 1000;
4128@end smallexample
4129
4130In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4131transformation has taken place.
4132
4133When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4134things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4135in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4136second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4137table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4138contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4139value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4140
4141@smallexample
4142 int foo = 1000;
4143@end smallexample
4144
10bf6894 4145creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4146holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4147number 1000 is initially stored.
4148
4149When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4150first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4151memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4152So:
4153
4154@smallexample
4155 foo = 1;
4156@end smallexample
4157
4158looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4159associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4160address. Whereas:
4161
4162@smallexample
4163 int * a = & foo;
4164@end smallexample
4165
10bf6894 4166looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4167and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4168the variable @samp{a}.
4169
4170Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4171the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4172an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4173
4174@smallexample
4175 foo = 1000;
4176@end smallexample
4177
4178creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4179the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4180address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4181linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4182access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4183
4184Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4185you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4186use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4187section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4188linker script contains these declarations:
4189
4190@smallexample
4191@group
4192 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4193 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4194 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4195@end group
4196@end smallexample
4197
4198Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4199
4200@smallexample
4201@group
4202 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4203
73ae6183
NC
4204 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4205@end group
4206@end smallexample
4207
4208Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4209Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4210arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4211
4212@smallexample
4213@group
4214 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4215
4216 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4217@end group
4218@end smallexample
4219
4220Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4221operators.
73ae6183 4222
252b5132 4223@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4224@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4225@kindex SECTIONS
4226The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4227into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4228
4229The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4230@smallexample
4231SECTIONS
4232@{
4233 @var{sections-command}
4234 @var{sections-command}
4235 @dots{}
4236@}
4237@end smallexample
4238
4239Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4240
4241@itemize @bullet
4242@item
4243an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4244@item
4245a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4246@item
4247an output section description
4248@item
4249an overlay description
4250@end itemize
4251
4252The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4253@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4254those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4255understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4256the layout of the output file.
4257
4258Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4259below.
4260
4261If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4262linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4263section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4264input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4265example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4266in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4267
4268@menu
4269* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4270* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4271* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4272* Input Section:: Input section description
4273* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4274* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4275* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4276* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4277* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4278@end menu
4279
4280@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4281@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4282The full description of an output section looks like this:
4283@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4284@group
7e7d5768 4285@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4286 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4287 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4288 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4289 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4290 @{
4291 @var{output-section-command}
4292 @var{output-section-command}
4293 @dots{}
abc9061b 4294 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4295@end group
4296@end smallexample
4297
4298Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4299
4300The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4301name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4302The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4303the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4304The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4305
4306Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4307
4308@itemize @bullet
4309@item
4310a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4311@item
4312an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4313@item
4314data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4315@item
4316a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4317@end itemize
4318
4319@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4320@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4321@cindex name, section
4322@cindex section name
4323The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4324meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4325support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4326must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4327example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4328output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4329names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4330quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4331characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4332commas must be quoted.
4333
4334The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4335Discarding}.
4336
4337@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4338@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4339@cindex address, section
4340@cindex section address
4341The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4342address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4343is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4344
4345If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4346section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4347to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4348alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4349contained within the output section.
4350
4351The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4352
4353@itemize @bullet
4354@item
4355If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4356is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4357in that region.
4358
4359@item
4360If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4361regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4362section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4363be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4364
4365@item
4366If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4367the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4368counter.
4369@end itemize
4370
4371@noindent
4372For example:
4373
252b5132
RH
4374@smallexample
4375.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4376@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4377
252b5132
RH
4378@noindent
4379and
ea5cae92 4380
252b5132
RH
4381@smallexample
4382.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4383@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4384
252b5132
RH
4385@noindent
4386are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4387@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4388counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4389counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4390input sections.
252b5132
RH
4391
4392The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4393For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4394so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4395do something like this:
4396@smallexample
4397.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4398@end smallexample
4399@noindent
4400This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4401aligned upward to the specified value.
4402
4403Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4404location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4405sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4406
4407@node Input Section
36f63dca 4408@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4409@cindex input sections
4410@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4411The most common output section command is an input section description.
4412
4413The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4414You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4415in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4416map the input files into your memory layout.
4417
4418@menu
4419* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4420* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4421* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4422* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4423* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4424@end menu
4425
4426@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4427@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4428@cindex input section basics
4429An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4430by a list of section names in parentheses.
4431
4432The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4433describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4434
4435The most common input section description is to include all input
4436sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4437include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4438@smallexample
4439*(.text)
4440@end smallexample
4441@noindent
18625d54 4442Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4443@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4444of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4445match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4446example:
252b5132 4447@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4448EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4449@end smallexample
4450@noindent
4451will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4452and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4453placed inside the section list, for example:
4454@smallexample
b4346c09 4455*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4456@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4457@noindent
4458The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4459two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4460more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4461
4462There are two ways to include more than one section:
4463@smallexample
4464*(.text .rdata)
4465*(.text) *(.rdata)
4466@end smallexample
4467@noindent
4468The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4469@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4470first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4471they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4472@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4473@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4474
8f1732fc
AB
4475When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4476is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4477immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4478@smallexample
4479*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4480@end smallexample
4481@noindent
4482will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4483@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4484from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4485exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4486could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4487@smallexample
4488*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4489@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4490@noindent
4491Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4492before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4493all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4494@smallexample
4495EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4496@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4497
252b5132
RH
4498You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4499You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4500needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4501@smallexample
4502data.o(.data)
4503@end smallexample
4504
ae17ab41
CM
4505To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4506of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4507
4508Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4509
4510@smallexample
4511@group
4512SECTIONS @{
4513 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4514 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4515@}
4516@end group
4517@end smallexample
4518
4519In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4520input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4521@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4522@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4523whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4524
967928e9
AM
4525You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4526matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4527with no whitespace around the colon.
4528
4529@table @samp
4530@item archive:file
4531matches file within archive
4532@item archive:
4533matches the whole archive
4534@item :file
4535matches file but not one in an archive
4536@end table
4537
4538Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4539wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4540single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4541@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4542within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4543also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4544other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4545from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4546command.
4547
252b5132
RH
4548If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4549the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4550commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4551@smallexample
4552data.o
4553@end smallexample
4554
967928e9
AM
4555When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4556and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4557characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4558name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4559did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4560though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4561@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4562the archive search path.
4563
4564@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4565@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4566@cindex input section wildcards
4567@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4568@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4569@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4570In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4571name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4572
4573The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4574pattern for the file name.
4575
4576The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4577
4578@table @samp
4579@item *
4580matches any number of characters
4581@item ?
4582matches any single character
4583@item [@var{chars}]
4584matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4585character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4586@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4587@item \
4588quotes the following character
4589@end table
4590
4591When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4592will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4593Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4594exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4595@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4596a @samp{/} character.
4597
4598File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4599specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4600does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4601
4602If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4603appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4604will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4605sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4606@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4607@smallexample
4608.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4609.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4610@end smallexample
4611
bcaa7b3e 4612@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4613Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4614in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4615this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4616pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4617@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4618into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4619
bcaa7b3e
L
4620@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4621@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4622difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4623descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4624Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4625reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4626
02ecc8e9
L
4627@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4628@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4629difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4630ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4631encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4632
bcaa7b3e
L
4633@cindex SORT
4634@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4635
4636When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4637can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4638
4639@enumerate
4640@item
4641@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4642It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4643sections have the same name.
4644@item
4645@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4646It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4647sections have the same alignment.
4648@item
c0065db7 4649@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4650treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4651@item
4652@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4653is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4654@item
4655All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4656@end enumerate
4657
a05a5b64 4658When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4659section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4660takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4661
4662If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4663command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4664treated as nested sorting command.
4665
4666@enumerate
4667@item
4668@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4669@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4670@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4671@item
4672@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4673@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4674@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4675@end enumerate
4676
4677If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4678command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4679
eda680f8 4680@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4681@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4682section sorting option.
4683
252b5132
RH
4684If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4685@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4686precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4687
4688This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4689files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4690sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4691The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4692with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4693linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4694@smallexample
4695@group
4696SECTIONS @{
4697 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4698 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4699 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4700 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4701@}
4702@end group
4703@end smallexample
4704
4705@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4706@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4707@cindex common symbol placement
4708@cindex uninitialized data placement
4709A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4710file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4711linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4712named @samp{COMMON}.
4713
4714You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4715other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4716particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4717input files are placed in another section.
4718
4719In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4720@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4721@smallexample
4722.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4723@end smallexample
4724
4725@cindex scommon section
4726@cindex small common symbols
4727Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4728example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4729symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4730different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4731the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4732symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4733to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4734locations.
4735
4736@cindex [COMMON]
4737You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4738notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4739@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4740
4741@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4742@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4743@cindex KEEP
4744@cindex garbage collection
4745When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4746it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4747This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4748with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4749@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4750
4751@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4752@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4753The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4754to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4755start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4756@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4757follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4758@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4759@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4760All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4761files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4762
4763@smallexample
4764@group
4765SECTIONS @{
4766 outputa 0x10000 :
4767 @{
4768 all.o
4769 foo.o (.input1)
4770 @}
36f63dca
NC
4771@end group
4772@group
252b5132
RH
4773 outputb :
4774 @{
4775 foo.o (.input2)
4776 foo1.o (.input1)
4777 @}
36f63dca
NC
4778@end group
4779@group
252b5132
RH
4780 outputc :
4781 @{
4782 *(.input1)
4783 *(.input2)
4784 @}
4785@}
4786@end group
a1ab1d2a 4787@end smallexample
252b5132 4788
cbd0eecf
L
4789If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4790and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4791automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4792__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4793indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4794respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4795C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4796
252b5132 4797@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4798@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4799@cindex data
4800@cindex section data
4801@cindex output section data
4802@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4803@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4804@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4805@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4806@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4807You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4808@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4809an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4810parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4811value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4812counter.
4813
4814The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4815store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4816bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4817stored.
4818
4819For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4820of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4821@smallexample
4822BYTE(1)
4823LONG(addr)
4824@end smallexample
4825
4826When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4827same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4828target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4829@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4830@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4831
4832If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4833which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4834When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4835true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4836endianness of the first input object file.
4837
36f63dca 4838Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4839between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4840@smallexample
4841SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4842@end smallexample
4843whereas this will work:
4844@smallexample
4845SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4846@end smallexample
4847
252b5132
RH
4848@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4849@cindex holes, filling
4850@cindex unspecified memory
4851You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4852current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4853otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4854gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4855with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4856necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4857point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4858than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4859different parts of an output section.
4860
4861This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4862value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4863@smallexample
563e308f 4864FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4865@end smallexample
4866
4867The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4868section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4869part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4870entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4871precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4872expression.
252b5132
RH
4873
4874@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4875@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4876There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4877commands.
4878
4879@table @code
4880@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4881@cindex input filename symbols
4882@cindex filename symbols
4883@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4884The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4885The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4886file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4887the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4888
4889This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4890normally used for any other object file format.
4891
4892@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4893@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4894@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4895@item CONSTRUCTORS
4896When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4897unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4898destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4899arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4900automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4901For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4902linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4903@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4904ignored for other object file formats.
4905
4906The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4907constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4908Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4909the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4910first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4911of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4912compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4913formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4914@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4915the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4916destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4917@code{exit}.
4918
4919For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4920arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4921addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4922and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4923linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4924runtime code expects to see.
4925
4926@smallexample
4927 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4928 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4929 *(.ctors)
4930 LONG(0)
4931 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4932 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4933 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4934 *(.dtors)
4935 LONG(0)
4936 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4937@end smallexample
4938
4939If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4940which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4941are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4942are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4943command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4944@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4945@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4946@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4947
4948Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4949and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4950need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4951scripts.
4952
4953@end table
4954
4955@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4956@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4957@cindex discarding sections
4958@cindex sections, discarding
4959@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4960The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4961This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4962may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4963@smallexample
49c13adb 4964.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4965@end smallexample
4966@noindent
4967will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4968@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4969sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4970space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4971too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4972space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4973@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4974@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4975This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4976
a0976ea4 4977The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4978on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4979symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4980the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4981section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4982
4983@cindex /DISCARD/
4984The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4985input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4986section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4987
4988@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4989@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4990@cindex output section attributes
4991We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4992like this:
0c71d759 4993
252b5132 4994@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4995@group
7e7d5768 4996@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4997 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 4998 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4999 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5000 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5001 @{
5002 @var{output-section-command}
5003 @var{output-section-command}
5004 @dots{}
562d3460 5005 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5006@end group
5007@end smallexample
0c71d759 5008
252b5132
RH
5009We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5010@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5011remaining section attributes.
5012
a1ab1d2a 5013@menu
252b5132
RH
5014* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5015* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5016* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5017* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5018* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5019* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5020* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5021* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5022@end menu
5023
5024@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5025@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5026Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5027parentheses. The following types are defined:
5028
5029@table @code
5030@item NOLOAD
5031The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5032loaded into memory when the program is run.
5033@item DSECT
5034@itemx COPY
5035@itemx INFO
5036@itemx OVERLAY
5037These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5038rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5039marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5040section when the program is run.
5041@end table
5042
5043@kindex NOLOAD
5044@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5045@cindex loading, preventing
5046The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5047the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5048the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5049@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5050need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5051@smallexample
5052@group
5053SECTIONS @{
5054 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5055 @dots{}
5056@}
5057@end group
5058@end smallexample
5059
5060@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5061@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5062@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5063@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5064@cindex load address
5065@cindex section load address
5066Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5067@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5068@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5069specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5070address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5071
ea5cae92
NC
5072The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5073specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5074takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5075load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5076region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5077
5078If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5079section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5080load address:
5081
5082@itemize @bullet
5083@item
5084If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5085the LMA address as well.
5086
5087@item
5088If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5089
5090@item
5091Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5092with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5093section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5094VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5095the last section in the located region.
5096
5097@item
5098If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5099that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5100
5101@item
5102If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5103section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5104@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5105
5106@cindex ROM initialized data
5107@cindex initialized data in ROM
5108This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5109example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5110called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5111@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5112even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5113uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5114defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5115counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5116
5117@smallexample
5118@group
5119SECTIONS
5120 @{
5121 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5122 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5123 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5124 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5125 .bss 0x3000 :
5126 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5127@}
5128@end group
5129@end smallexample
5130
5131The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5132this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5133the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5134how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5135script.
5136
5137@smallexample
5138@group
5139extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5140char *src = &_etext;
5141char *dst = &_data;
5142
ea5cae92
NC
5143/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5144while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5145 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5146
ea5cae92 5147/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5148for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5149 *dst = 0;
5150@end group
5151@end smallexample
5152
bbf115d3
L
5153@node Forced Output Alignment
5154@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5155@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5156@cindex forcing output section alignment
5157@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5158You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5159alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5160intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5161
7e7d5768
AM
5162@node Forced Input Alignment
5163@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5164@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5165@cindex forcing input section alignment
5166@cindex input section alignment
5167You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5168SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5169sections, whether larger or smaller.
5170
0c71d759
NC
5171@node Output Section Constraint
5172@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5173@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5174@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5175@cindex constraints on output sections
5176You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5177of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5178read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5179@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5180
252b5132 5181@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5182@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5183@kindex >@var{region}
5184@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5185@cindex memory regions and sections
5186You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5187using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5188
5189Here is a simple example:
5190@smallexample
5191@group
5192MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5193SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5194@end group
5195@end smallexample
5196
5197@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5198@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5199@kindex :@var{phdr}
5200@cindex section, assigning to program header
5201@cindex program headers and sections
5202You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5203using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5204one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5205assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5206@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5207linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5208
5209Here is a simple example:
5210@smallexample
5211@group
5212PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5213SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216
5217@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5218@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5219@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5220@cindex section fill pattern
5221@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5222You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5223@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5224(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5225within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5226alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5227necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5228of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5229an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5230fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5231other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5232pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5233expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5234
5235You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5236output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5237
5238Here is a simple example:
5239@smallexample
5240@group
563e308f 5241SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5242@end group
5243@end smallexample
5244
5245@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5246@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5247@kindex OVERLAY
5248@cindex overlays
5249An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5250are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5251the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5252copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5253required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5254can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5255than another.
5256
5257Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5258@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5259output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5260command is as follows:
5261@smallexample
5262@group
5263OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5264 @{
5265 @var{secname1}
5266 @{
5267 @var{output-section-command}
5268 @var{output-section-command}
5269 @dots{}
5270 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5271 @var{secname2}
5272 @{
5273 @var{output-section-command}
5274 @var{output-section-command}
5275 @dots{}
5276 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5277 @dots{}
abc9061b 5278 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5279@end group
5280@end smallexample
5281
5282Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5283section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5284section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5285those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5286except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5287sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5288
abc9061b
CC
5289The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5290the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5291
252b5132
RH
5292The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5293addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5294memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5295whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5296and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5297and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5298
56dd11f0
NC
5299If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5300references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5301the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5302sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5303@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5304
5305For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5306provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5307defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5308@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5309the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5310within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5311symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5312
5313At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5314the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5315
5316Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5317@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5318@smallexample
5319@group
5320 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5321 @{
5322 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5323 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5324 @}
5325@end group
5326@end smallexample
5327@noindent
5328This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5329address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5330@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5331following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5332@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5333@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5334
5335C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5336like the following.
5337
5338@smallexample
5339@group
5340 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5341 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5342 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5343@end group
5344@end smallexample
5345
5346Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5347everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5348example could have been written identically as follows.
5349
5350@smallexample
5351@group
5352 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5353 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5354 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5355 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5356 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5357 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5358 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5359@end group
5360@end smallexample
5361
5362@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5363@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5364@kindex MEMORY
5365@cindex memory regions
5366@cindex regions of memory
5367@cindex allocating memory
5368@cindex discontinuous memory
5369The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5370memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5371
5372The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5373memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5374may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5375can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5376set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5377regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5378around to fit into the available regions.
5379
127fcdff
AB
5380A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5381however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5382specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5383@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5384@smallexample
5385@group
a1ab1d2a 5386MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5387 @{
5388 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5389 @dots{}
5390 @}
5391@end group
5392@end smallexample
5393
5394The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5395region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5396Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5397with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5398must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5399add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5400command.
252b5132
RH
5401
5402@cindex memory region attributes
5403The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5404whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5405not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5406@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5407section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5408the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5409them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5410
5411The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5412@table @samp
5413@item R
5414Read-only section
5415@item W
5416Read/write section
5417@item X
5418Executable section
5419@item A
5420Allocatable section
5421@item I
5422Initialized section
5423@item L
5424Same as @samp{I}
5425@item !
c09e9a8c 5426Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5427@end table
5428
81c688d5 5429If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5430@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5431attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5432unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5433not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5434string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5435or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5436the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5437
5438@kindex ORIGIN =
5439@kindex o =
5440@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5441The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5442the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5443cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5444abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5445@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5446
5447@kindex LENGTH =
5448@kindex len =
5449@kindex l =
5450The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5451region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5452be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5453@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5454
5455In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5456available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5457and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5458linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5459is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5460or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5461explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5462region.
5463
5464@smallexample
5465@group
a1ab1d2a 5466MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5467 @{
5468 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5469 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5470 @}
5471@end group
5472@end smallexample
5473
5474Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5475specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5476@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5477a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5478output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5479was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5480the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5481output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5482region, the linker will issue an error message.
5483
3ec57632 5484It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5485expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5486@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5487
5488@smallexample
5489@group
c0065db7 5490 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5491@end group
5492@end smallexample
5493
252b5132
RH
5494@node PHDRS
5495@section PHDRS Command
5496@kindex PHDRS
5497@cindex program headers
5498@cindex ELF program headers
5499@cindex program segments
5500@cindex segments, ELF
5501The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5502@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5503loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5504program with the @samp{-p} option.
5505
5506When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5507reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5508program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5509This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5510interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5511
5512The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5513in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5514precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5515the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5516not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5517
5518The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5519generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5520ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5521
5522This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5523@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5524
5525@smallexample
5526@group
5527PHDRS
5528@{
5529 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5530 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5531@}
5532@end group
5533@end smallexample
5534
5535The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5536of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5537header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5538with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5539must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5540is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5541
5542Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5543system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5544specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5545sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5546attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5547Section Phdr}.
5548
5549It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5550merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5551repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5552contain the section.
5553
5554If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5555then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5556not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5557convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5558placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5559default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5560segment at all.
5561
5562@kindex FILEHDR
5563@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5564You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5565the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5566The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5567file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5568include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5569segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5570these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5571
5572The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5573value of the keyword.
5574
5575@table @asis
5576@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5577Indicates an unused program header.
5578
5579@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5580Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5581the file.
5582
5583@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5584Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5585
5586@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5587Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5588found.
5589
5590@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5591Indicates a segment holding note information.
5592
5593@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5594A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5595ABI.
5596
5597@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5598Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5599
1a9ccd70
NC
5600@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5601Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5602
252b5132
RH
5603@item @var{expression}
5604An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5605be used for types not defined above.
5606@end table
5607
5608You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5609in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5610@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5611Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5612output section attribute.
5613
5614The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5615which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5616explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5617an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5618header.
5619
5620Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5621headers used on a native ELF system.
5622
5623@example
5624@group
5625PHDRS
5626@{
5627 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5628 interp PT_INTERP ;
5629 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5630 data PT_LOAD ;
5631 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5632@}
5633
5634SECTIONS
5635@{
5636 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5637 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5638 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5639 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5640 @dots{}
5641 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5642 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5643 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5644 @dots{}
5645@}
5646@end group
5647@end example
5648
5649@node VERSION
5650@section VERSION Command
5651@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5652@cindex symbol versions
5653@cindex version script
5654@cindex versions of symbols
5655The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5656only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5657symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5658a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5659shared library.
5660
5661You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5662you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5663also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5664
5665The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5666@smallexample
5667VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5668@end smallexample
5669
5670The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5671Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5672version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5673version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5674version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5675scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5676library.
5677
5678The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5679examples.
5680
5681@smallexample
5682VERS_1.1 @{
5683 global:
5684 foo1;
5685 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5686 old*;
5687 original*;
5688 new*;
252b5132
RH
5689@};
5690
5691VERS_1.2 @{
5692 foo2;
5693@} VERS_1.1;
5694
5695VERS_2.0 @{
5696 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5697 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5698 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5699 "f(int, double)";
5700 @};
252b5132
RH
5701@} VERS_1.2;
5702@end smallexample
5703
5704This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5705version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5706The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5707a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5708of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5709symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5710is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5711in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5712However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5713name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5714
5715Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5716depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5717to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5718
5719Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5720depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5721and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5722
5723When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5724specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5725unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5726unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5727somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5728wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5729wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5730set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5731ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5732
5733The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5734they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5735could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5736However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5737
0f6bf451 5738Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5739in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5740symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5741won't.
5742
5743@smallexample
7c9c73be 5744@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5745@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5746
252b5132
RH
5747When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5748symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5749requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5750shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5751loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5752linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5753application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5754way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5755all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5756search for each symbol reference.
5757
5758The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5759doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5760that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5761functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5762the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5763required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5764that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5765versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5766the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5767
5768There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5769first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5770source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5771script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5772maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5773@smallexample
5774__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5775@end smallexample
5776@noindent
5777in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5778be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5779The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5780@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5781takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5782
5783The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5784function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5785an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5786version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5787linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5788
5789To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5790source file. Here is an example:
5791
5792@smallexample
5793__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5794__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5795__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5796__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5797@end smallexample
5798
5799In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5800unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5801example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5802@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5803
5804When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5805some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5806this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5807@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5808declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5809you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5810
5811If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5812within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5813(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5814specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5815
cb840a31
L
5816You can also specify the language in the version script:
5817
5818@smallexample
5819VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5820@end smallexample
5821
c0065db7 5822The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5823The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5824demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5825patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5826@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5827
86043bbb
MM
5828Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5829described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5830or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5831the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5832whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5833cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5834might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5835should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5836expect when you upgrade.
5837
252b5132
RH
5838@node Expressions
5839@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5840@cindex expressions
5841@cindex arithmetic
5842The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5843that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5844expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5845host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5846
5847You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5848
5849The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5850expressions.
5851
5852@menu
5853* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5854* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5855* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5856* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5857* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5858* Operators:: Operators
5859* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5860* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5861* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5862@end menu
5863
5864@node Constants
5865@subsection Constants
5866@cindex integer notation
5867@cindex constants in linker scripts
5868All constants are integers.
5869
5870As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5871octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5872hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5873@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5874@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5875value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5876
5877@cindex scaled integers
5878@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5879@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5880@cindex suffixes for integers
5881@cindex integer suffixes
5882In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5883constant by
5884@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5885@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5886@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5887@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5888@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5889@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5890@tex
5891${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5892@end tex
5893@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5894respectively. For example, the following
5895all refer to the same quantity:
5896
252b5132 5897@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5898_fourk_1 = 4K;
5899_fourk_2 = 4096;
5900_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5901_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5902@end smallexample
5903
8a308ae8
NC
5904Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5905conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5906
0c71d759
NC
5907@node Symbolic Constants
5908@subsection Symbolic Constants
5909@cindex symbolic constants
5910@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5911It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5912the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5913
5914@table @code
5915@item MAXPAGESIZE
5916@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5917The target's maximum page size.
5918
5919@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5920@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5921The target's default page size.
5922@end table
5923
5924So for example:
5925
5926@smallexample
9d5777a3 5927 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5928@end smallexample
5929
5930will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5931supported by the target.
5932
252b5132
RH
5933@node Symbols
5934@subsection Symbol Names
5935@cindex symbol names
5936@cindex names
5937@cindex quoted symbol names
5938@kindex "
5939Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5940and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5941Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5942specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5943keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5944@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5945"SECTION" = 9;
5946"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5947@end smallexample
5948
5949Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5950to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5951whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5952
ecca9871
L
5953@node Orphan Sections
5954@subsection Orphan Sections
5955@cindex orphan
5956Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5957are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5958script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5959output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5960in which to place the orphaned input section.
5961
5962If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5963an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5964placed at the end of that output section.
5965
5966If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5967sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5968name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5969orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5970one new output section.
5971
5972If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5973then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5974in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5975linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5976attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5977sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5978support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5979
a05a5b64
TP
5980The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5981(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5982output sections an orphan is placed in.
5983
252b5132
RH
5984@node Location Counter
5985@subsection The Location Counter
5986@kindex .
5987@cindex dot
5988@cindex location counter
5989@cindex current output location
5990The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5991current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5992location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5993within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5994anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5995
5996@cindex holes
5997Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5998moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5999location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6000and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6001doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6002
6003@smallexample
6004SECTIONS
6005@{
6006 output :
6007 @{
6008 file1(.text)
6009 . = . + 1000;
6010 file2(.text)
6011 . += 1000;
6012 file3(.text)
563e308f 6013 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6014@}
6015@end smallexample
6016@noindent
6017In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6018located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6019followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6020@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6021@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6022specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6023
5c6bbab8
NC
6024@cindex dot inside sections
6025Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6026current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6027statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6028absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6029however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6030not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6031
6032@smallexample
6033SECTIONS
6034@{
6035 . = 0x100
6036 .text: @{
6037 *(.text)
6038 . = 0x200
6039 @}
6040 . = 0x500
6041 .data: @{
6042 *(.data)
6043 . += 0x600
6044 @}
6045@}
6046@end smallexample
6047
6048The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6049and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6050the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6051much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6052move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6053and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6054the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6055the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6056
b5666f2f
AM
6057@cindex dot outside sections
6058Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6059output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6060needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6061
6062@smallexample
6063SECTIONS
6064@{
6065 start_of_text = . ;
6066 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6067 end_of_text = . ;
6068
6069 start_of_data = . ;
6070 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6071 end_of_data = . ;
6072@}
6073@end smallexample
6074
6075If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6076not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6077between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6078should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6079blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6080the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6081sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6082statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6083special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6084place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6085as follows:
6086
6087@smallexample
6088SECTIONS
6089@{
6090 start_of_text = . ;
6091 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6092 end_of_text = . ;
6093
6094 start_of_data = . ;
6095 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6096 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6097 end_of_data = . ;
6098@}
6099@end smallexample
6100
6101This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6102@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6103placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6104assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6105a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6106section. So you could write:
6107
6108@smallexample
6109SECTIONS
6110@{
6111 start_of_text = . ;
6112 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6113 end_of_text = . ;
6114
6115 . = . ;
6116 start_of_data = . ;
6117 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6118 end_of_data = . ;
6119@}
6120@end smallexample
6121
6122Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6123@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6124
252b5132
RH
6125@need 2000
6126@node Operators
6127@subsection Operators
6128@cindex operators for arithmetic
6129@cindex arithmetic operators
6130@cindex precedence in expressions
6131The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6132the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6133@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6134@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6135@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6136@smallexample
6137precedence associativity Operators Notes
6138(highest)
61391 left ! - ~ (1)
61402 left * / %
61413 left + -
61424 left >> <<
61435 left == != > < <= >=
61446 left &
61457 left |
61468 left &&
61479 left ||
614810 right ? :
614911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6150(lowest)
6151@end smallexample
6152Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6153(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6154(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6155@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6156@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6157@tex
6158\vskip \baselineskip
6159%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6160\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6161\hrule
6162\halign
6163{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6164height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6165&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6166height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6167\noalign{\hrule}
6168height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6169&highest&&&&&\cr
6170% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6171&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6172&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6173&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6174&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6175&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6176&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6177&7&&left&&|&\cr
6178&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6179&9&&left&&||&\cr
6180&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6181&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6182&lowest&&&&&\cr
6183height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6184\hrule}
6185@end tex
6186@iftex
6187{
6188@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6189@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6190@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6191}
6192@end iftex
6193@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6194
6195@node Evaluation
6196@subsection Evaluation
6197@cindex lazy evaluation
6198@cindex expression evaluation order
6199The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6200an expression when absolutely necessary.
6201
6202The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6203address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6204regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6205as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6206
6207However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6208until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6209other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6210for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6211
6212The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6213assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6214allocation.
6215
6216Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6217@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6218
6219If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6220available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6221following
6222@smallexample
6223@group
6224SECTIONS
6225 @{
a1ab1d2a 6226 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6227 @{ *(.text) @}
6228 @}
6229@end group
6230@end smallexample
6231@noindent
6232will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6233address}.
6234
6235@node Expression Section
6236@subsection The Section of an Expression
6237@cindex expression sections
6238@cindex absolute expressions
6239@cindex relative expressions
6240@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6241@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6242@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6243Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6244relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6245using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6246value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6247symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6248operations.
6249
abf4be64
AM
6250Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6251section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6252address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6253@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6254functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6255One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6256(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6257differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6258versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6259section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6260Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6261absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6262given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6263everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6264
6265In the following simple example,
252b5132 6266
7542af2a
AM
6267@smallexample
6268@group
6269SECTIONS
6270 @{
6271 . = 0x100;
6272 __executable_start = 0x100;
6273 .data :
6274 @{
6275 . = 0x10;
6276 __data_start = 0x10;
6277 *(.data)
6278 @}
6279 @dots{}
6280 @}
6281@end group
6282@end smallexample
252b5132 6283
7542af2a
AM
6284both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6285address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6286@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6287section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6288
5c3049d2
AM
6289For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6290addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6291
6292@itemize @bullet
6293@item
c05f749e
AM
6294Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6295operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6296absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6297@item
7542af2a
AM
6298Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6299relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6300and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6301@item
c05f749e
AM
6302Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6303in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6304address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6305before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6306@end itemize
6307
6308The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6309
6310@itemize @bullet
6311@item
6312An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6313@item
6314The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6315@item
9bc8bb33 6316The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6317relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6318(after above conversions) is also a number when
6319@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6320but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6321@item
6322The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6323relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6324section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6325@item
6326The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6327conversions) is an absolute address.
6328@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6329
6330You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6331to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6332create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6333section @samp{.data}:
6334@smallexample
6335SECTIONS
6336 @{
6337 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6338 @}
6339@end smallexample
6340@noindent
6341If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6342@samp{.data} section.
6343
7542af2a
AM
6344Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6345particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6346
252b5132
RH
6347@node Builtin Functions
6348@subsection Builtin Functions
6349@cindex functions in expressions
6350The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6351use in linker script expressions.
6352
6353@table @code
6354@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6355@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6356@cindex expression, absolute
6357Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6358of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6359value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6360normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6361
6362@item ADDR(@var{section})
6363@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6364@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6365Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6366script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6367the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6368@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6369@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6370the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6371@smallexample
6372@group
6373SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6374 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6375 @{
252b5132
RH
6376 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6377 @dots{}
6378 @}
6379 .output :
6380 @{
6381 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6382 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6383 @}
6384@dots{} @}
6385@end group
6386@end smallexample
6387
876f4090
NS
6388@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6389@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6390@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6391@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6392@cindex round up location counter
6393@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6394@cindex round up expression
6395@cindex align expression
6396Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6397to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6398doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6399arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6400expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6401equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6402
6403Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6404next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6405variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6406input sections:
252b5132
RH
6407@smallexample
6408@group
6409SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6410 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6411 *(.data)
6412 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6413 @}
6414@dots{} @}
6415@end group
6416@end smallexample
6417@noindent
6418The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6419a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6420a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6421of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6422
6423The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6424
362c1d1a
NS
6425@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6426@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6427@cindex section alignment
6428Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6429been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6430evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6431the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6432value in that section.
6433@smallexample
6434@group
6435SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6436 .output @{
6437 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6438 @dots{}
6439 @}
6440@dots{} @}
6441@end group
6442@end smallexample
6443
252b5132
RH
6444@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6445@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6446This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6447scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6448section.
6449
2d20f7bf
JJ
6450@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6451@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6452This is equivalent to either
6453@smallexample
6454(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6455@end smallexample
6456or
6457@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6458(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6459 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6460@end smallexample
6461@noindent
6462depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6463for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6464@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6465If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6466memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6467bytes in the on-disk file.
6468
6469This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6470any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6471@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6472be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6473running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6474that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6475page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6476
6477@noindent
6478Example:
6479@smallexample
6480 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6481@end smallexample
6482
6483@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6484@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6485This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6486evaluation purposes.
6487
6488@smallexample
6489 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6490@end smallexample
6491
a4f5ad88
JJ
6492@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6493@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6494This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6495@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6496When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6497does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6498@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6499argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6500script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6501@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6502padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6503section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6504
6505@smallexample
6506 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6507@end smallexample
6508
252b5132
RH
6509@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6510@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6511@cindex symbol defaults
6512Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6513defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6514return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6515default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6516shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6517the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6518existed, its value is preserved:
6519
6520@smallexample
6521@group
6522SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6523 .text : @{
6524 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6525 @dots{}
6526 @}
6527 @dots{}
6528@}
6529@end group
6530@end smallexample
6531
3ec57632
NC
6532@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6533@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6534Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6535
252b5132
RH
6536@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6537@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6538@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6539Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6540Section LMA}).
6541
2e53f7d6
NC
6542@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6543@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6544Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6545@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6546
252b5132
RH
6547@kindex MAX
6548@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6549Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6550
6551@kindex MIN
6552@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6553Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6554
6555@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6556@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6557@cindex unallocated address, next
6558Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6559This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6560use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6561output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6562
3ec57632
NC
6563@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6564@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6565Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6566
ba916c8a
MM
6567@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6568@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6569Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6570value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6571@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6572will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6573can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6574``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6575name.
6576
252b5132
RH
6577@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6578@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6579@cindex section size
6580Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6581been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6582evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6583@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6584@smallexample
6585@group
6586SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6587 .output @{
6588 .start = . ;
6589 @dots{}
6590 .end = . ;
6591 @}
6592 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6593 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6594@dots{} @}
6595@end group
6596@end smallexample
6597
6598@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6599@itemx sizeof_headers
6600@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6601@cindex header size
6602Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6603information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6604this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6605choose, to facilitate paging.
6606
6607@cindex not enough room for program headers
6608@cindex program headers, not enough room
6609When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6610@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6611number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6612addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6613additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6614room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6615the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6616script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6617you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6618command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6619@end table
6620
6621@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6622@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6623@cindex implicit linker scripts
6624If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6625an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6626linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6627linker will report an error.
6628
6629An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6630
6631Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6632assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6633commands.
6634
6635Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6636at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6637read. This can affect archive searching.
6638
6639@ifset GENERIC
6640@node Machine Dependent
6641@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6642
6643@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6644@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6645sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6646functionality are not listed.
6647
6648@menu
36f63dca
NC
6649@ifset H8300
6650* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6651@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6652@ifset M68HC11
6653* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6654@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6655@ifset ARM
6656* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6657@end ifset
6658@ifset HPPA
6659* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6660@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6661@ifset M68K
6662* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6663@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6664@ifset MIPS
6665* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6666@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6667@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6668* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6669@end ifset
2469cfa2 6670@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6671* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6672@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6673@ifset NDS32
6674* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6675@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6676@ifset NIOSII
6677* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6678@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6679@ifset POWERPC
6680* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6681@end ifset
6682@ifset POWERPC64
6683* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6684@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6685@ifset S/390
6686* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6687@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6688@ifset SPU
6689* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6690@end ifset
74459f0e 6691@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6692* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6693@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6694@ifset WIN32
6695* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6696@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6697@ifset XTENSA
6698* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6699@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6700@end menu
6701@end ifset
6702
252b5132
RH
6703@ifset H8300
6704@ifclear GENERIC
6705@raisesections
6706@end ifclear
6707
6708@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6709@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6710
6711@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6712For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6713you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6714
6715@table @emph
6716@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6717@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6718@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6719targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6720program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6721respectively.
6722
6723@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6724@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6725@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6726@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6727sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6728page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6729(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6730@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6731top page of memory).
1502569c 6732
81f5558e
NC
6733@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6734indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6735displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6736the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6737@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6738whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6739range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6740
1502569c 6741@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6742@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6743biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6744which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6745page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6746(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6747@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6748the top page of memory).
6749
6750@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6751@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
675232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6753changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6754(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6755@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6756the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6757@end table
6758
6759@ifclear GENERIC
6760@lowersections
6761@end ifclear
6762@end ifset
6763
36f63dca 6764@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6765@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6766@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6767@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6768@node Renesas
6769@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6770
c2dcd04e
NC
6771@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6772H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6773options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6774@end ifset
6775@end ifclear
6776
36f63dca
NC
6777@ifset ARM
6778@ifclear GENERIC
6779@raisesections
6780@end ifclear
6781
93fd0973
SC
6782@ifset M68HC11
6783@ifclear GENERIC
6784@raisesections
6785@end ifclear
6786
6787@node M68HC11/68HC12
6788@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6789
6790@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6791
6792@subsection Linker Relaxation
6793
6794For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6795optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6796
6797@table @emph
6798@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6799@item relaxing address modes
6800@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6801targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6802program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6803respectively.
6804
6805@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6806transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6807page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6808
6809@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6810When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6811of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6812addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6813@code{bset} instructions.
6814
6815@end table
6816
6817@subsection Trampoline Generation
6818
6819@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6820@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6821For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6822call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6823will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6824trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6825case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6826point to the function trampoline.
6827
6828@ifclear GENERIC
6829@lowersections
6830@end ifclear
6831@end ifset
6832
36f63dca 6833@node ARM
3674e28a 6834@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6835
6836@cindex ARM interworking support
6837@kindex --support-old-code
6838For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6839between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6840been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6841line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6842libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6843option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6844given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6845which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6846the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6847non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6848
6849@cindex thumb entry point
6850@cindex entry point, thumb
6851@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6852The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6853@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6854But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6855branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6856executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6857
ce11ba6c
KT
6858@cindex PE import table prefixing
6859@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6860The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6861the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6862element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6863import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6864
e489d0ae
PB
6865@cindex BE8
6866@kindex --be8
6867The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6868executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6869objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6870option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6871little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6872
3674e28a
PB
6873@cindex TARGET1
6874@kindex --target1-rel
6875@kindex --target1-abs
6876The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6877@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6878or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6879and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6880
6881@cindex TARGET2
6882@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6883The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6884@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6885meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6886@table @samp
6887@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6888@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6889@item abs
6890@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6891@item got-rel
6892@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6893@end table
6894
319850b4
JB
6895@cindex FIX_V4BX
6896@kindex --fix-v4bx
6897The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6898specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6899interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6900also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6901
6902In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6903linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6904@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6905
6906In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6907relocations are ignored.
6908
845b51d6
PB
6909@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6910@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6911Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6912relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6913
6914@smallexample
6915TST rM, #1
6916MOVEQ PC, rM
6917BX Rn
6918@end smallexample
6919
6920This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6921and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6922condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6923
33bfe774
JB
6924@cindex USE_BLX
6925@kindex --use-blx
6926The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6927BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6928situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6929code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6930each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6931
6932This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6933specify it if you are using that target.
6934
c6dd86c6
JB
6935@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6936@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6937The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6938bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6939instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6940to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6941the support code can read the intended values.
6942
6943The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6944intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6945and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6946intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6947full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6948you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6949
6950If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6951enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6952@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6953mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6954vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6955@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6956
6957If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6958potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6959such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6960first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6961instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6962the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6963are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6964
2de70689
MGD
6965@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6966@kindex --fix-arm1176
6967@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6968The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6969in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6970are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6971unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6972
9d5777a3 6973Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6974Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6975http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6976
a504d23a
LA
6977@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6978@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6979
6980The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6981workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6982the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6983off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6984the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6985core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6986integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6987VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6988
6989The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6990necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6991
6992The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6993@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6994STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6995linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6996@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6997
6998If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6999potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7000such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7001replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7002branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7003then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7004
7005The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7006the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7007
7008The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7009they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7010there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7011occurs.
7012
7013The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7014PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7015large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7016cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7017occurs.
7018
bf21ed78
MS
7019@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7020@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7021The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7022warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7023enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7024linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7025using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7026not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7027
7028@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7029@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7030The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7031warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7032@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7033linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7034using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7035
726150b7
NC
7036@cindex PIC_VENEER
7037@kindex --pic-veneer
7038The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7039ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7040is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7041@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7042
7043@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7044@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7045The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7046code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7047perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7048placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7049controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7050The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7051duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7052group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7053code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7054where they should be placed.
7055
7056The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7057@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7058placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7059branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7060placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7061value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7062exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7063A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7064linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7065from the input sections.
7066
7067The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7068@samp{N = +1}.
7069
1a51c1a4
NC
7070Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7071only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7072otherwise.
7073
1db37fe6
YG
7074@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7075@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7076@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7077The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7078
7079The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7080
68fcca92
JW
7081@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7082@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7083@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7084The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7085
7086Please contact ARM for further details.
7087
1db37fe6
YG
7088@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7089@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7090@cindex Merging exidx entries
7091The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7092
7093@kindex --long-plt
7094@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7095The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7096which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7097entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7098
1f56df9d
JW
7099@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7100@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7101The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7102link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7103
4ba2ef8f
TP
7104@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7105All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7106Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7107@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7108veneers in memory.
7109
54ddd295
TP
7110@kindex --cmse-implib
7111@cindex Secure gateway import library
7112The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7113specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7114secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7115executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7116
0955507f
TP
7117@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7118@cindex Input import library
7119The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7120must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7121given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7122in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7123@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7124library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7125library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7126for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7127specified.
7128
36f63dca
NC
7129@ifclear GENERIC
7130@lowersections
7131@end ifclear
7132@end ifset
7133
7134@ifset HPPA
7135@ifclear GENERIC
7136@raisesections
7137@end ifclear
7138
7139@node HPPA ELF32
7140@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7141@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7142@kindex --multi-subspace
7143When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7144import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7145The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7146stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7147multiple sub-spaces.
7148
7149@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7150@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7151Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7152stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7153@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7154sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7155a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7156the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7157conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7158prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7159A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7160branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7161@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7162@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7163detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7164positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7165
7166Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7167single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7168create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7169large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7170
7171@ifclear GENERIC
7172@lowersections
7173@end ifclear
7174@end ifset
7175
7fb9f789
NC
7176@ifset M68K
7177@ifclear GENERIC
7178@raisesections
7179@end ifclear
7180
7181@node M68K
7182@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7183
7184@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7185@kindex --got=@var{type}
7186The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7187The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7188@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7189the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7190@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7191entries only at non-negative offsets.
7192@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7193entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7194support such GOTs.
7195@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7196output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7197file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7198files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7199
7200@ifclear GENERIC
7201@lowersections
7202@end ifclear
7203@end ifset
7204
833794fc
MR
7205@ifset MIPS
7206@ifclear GENERIC
7207@raisesections
7208@end ifclear
7209
7210@node MIPS
7211@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7212
7213@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7214@kindex --insn32
7215@kindex --no-insn32
7216The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7217microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7218in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7219used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7220or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7221including 16-bit ones where possible.
7222
8b10b0b3
MR
7223@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7224@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7225@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7226The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7227control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7228@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7229relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7230calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7231relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7232instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7233or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7234the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7235
833794fc
MR
7236@ifclear GENERIC
7237@lowersections
7238@end ifclear
7239@end ifset
7240
36f63dca
NC
7241@ifset MMIX
7242@ifclear GENERIC
7243@raisesections
7244@end ifclear
7245
7246@node MMIX
7247@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7248For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7249@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7250understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7251can translate between the two formats.
7252
7253There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7254Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7255registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7256equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7257@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7258global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7259this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7260symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7261
7a2de473
HPN
7262Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7263@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7264The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7265of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7266
7267Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7268are left out from an mmo file.
7269
7270@ifclear GENERIC
7271@lowersections
7272@end ifclear
7273@end ifset
7274
7275@ifset MSP430
7276@ifclear GENERIC
7277@raisesections
7278@end ifclear
7279
7280@node MSP430
7281@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7282For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7283will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7284just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7285
7286@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7287The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7288
7289@table @code
7290@item @samp{.vectors}
7291Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7292
7293@item @samp{.bootloader}
7294Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7295in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7296
7297@item @samp{.infomem}
7298Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7299this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7300
c0065db7 7301@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7302This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7303in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7304
7305@item @samp{.noinit}
7306Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7307
c0065db7 7308The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7309@end table
7310
7ef3addb
JL
7311@table @option
7312@cindex MSP430 Options
7313@kindex --code-region
7314@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7315This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7316argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7317using this option.
7318
7319@kindex --data-region
7320@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7321This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7322[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7323for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7324
7325@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7326@item --disable-sec-transformation
7327Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7328and @code{--data-region} options.
7329This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7330wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7331not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7332@end table
7333
36f63dca
NC
7334@ifclear GENERIC
7335@lowersections
7336@end ifclear
7337@end ifset
7338
35c08157
KLC
7339@ifset NDS32
7340@ifclear GENERIC
7341@raisesections
7342@end ifclear
7343
7344@node NDS32
7345@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7346@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7347For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7348relaxes objects according to these options.
7349
7350@table @code
7351@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7352Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7353
7354@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7355Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7356
7357@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7358Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7359
7360@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7361Export the EX9 table after linking.
7362
7363@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7364Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7365
7366@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7367Update the existing EX9 table.
7368
7369@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7370Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7371
7372@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7373Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7374
7375@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7376Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7377
7378@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7379Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7380@end table
7381
7382@ifclear GENERIC
7383@lowersections
7384@end ifclear
7385@end ifset
7386
78058a5e
SL
7387@ifset NIOSII
7388@ifclear GENERIC
7389@raisesections
7390@end ifclear
7391
7392@node Nios II
7393@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7394@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7395@kindex --relax on Nios II
7396
7397Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7398transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7399which may result in @command{ld} giving
7400@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7401The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7402trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7403outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7404trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7405be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7406larger than 256MB.
7407
7408The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7409is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7410@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7411locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7412source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7413register as a temporary.
7414
7415Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7416relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7417option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7418
7419@ifclear GENERIC
7420@lowersections
7421@end ifclear
7422@end ifset
7423
2a60a7a8
AM
7424@ifset POWERPC
7425@ifclear GENERIC
7426@raisesections
7427@end ifclear
7428
7429@node PowerPC ELF32
7430@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7431@cindex PowerPC long branches
7432@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7433Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7434displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7435@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7436@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7437the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7438section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7439section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7440@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7441both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7442considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7443
7444@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7445@table @option
7446@cindex PowerPC PLT
7447@kindex --bss-plt
7448@item --bss-plt
7449Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7450generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7451the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7452writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7453@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7454PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7455compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7456BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7457
016687f8
AM
7458@kindex --secure-plt
7459@item --secure-plt
7460@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7461@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7462when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7463layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7464style BSS PLT.
7465
2a60a7a8
AM
7466@cindex PowerPC GOT
7467@kindex --sdata-got
7468@item --sdata-got
7469The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7470sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7471@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7472section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7473@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7474@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7475@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7476@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7477PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7478pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7479GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7480really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7481
7482@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7483@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7484@item --emit-stub-syms
7485This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7486symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7487
7488@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7489@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7490@item --no-tls-optimize
7491PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7492sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7493disable the optimization.
7494@end table
7495
7496@ifclear GENERIC
7497@lowersections
7498@end ifclear
7499@end ifset
7500
7501@ifset POWERPC64
7502@ifclear GENERIC
7503@raisesections
7504@end ifclear
7505
7506@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7507@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7508
7509@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7510@table @option
7511@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7512@kindex --stub-group-size
7513@item --stub-group-size
7514Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7515by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7516@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7517sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7518a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7519the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7520conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7521prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7522A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7523branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7524@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7525@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7526detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7527positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7528
7529Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7530single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7531create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7532large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7533
7534@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7535@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7536@item --emit-stub-syms
7537This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7538symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7539
7540@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7541@kindex --dotsyms
7542@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7543@item --dotsyms
7544@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7545These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7546in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7547function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7548code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7549properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7550to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7551@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7552dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7553feature.
7554
7ae4ea7d
AM
7555@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7556@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7557@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7558@item --save-restore-funcs
7559@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7560These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7561provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7562@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7563function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7564link.
7565
2a60a7a8
AM
7566@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7567@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7568@item --no-tls-optimize
7569PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7570sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7571disable the optimization.
7572
7c9cf415
AM
7573@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7574@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7575@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7576@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7577@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7578These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7579stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7580an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7581@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7582stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7583option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7584Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7585slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7586application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7587normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7588
2a60a7a8
AM
7589@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7590@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7591@item --no-opd-optimize
7592PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7593corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7594the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7595Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7596
7597@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7598@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7599@item --non-overlapping-opd
7600Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7601@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7602the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7603entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7604
7605@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7606@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7607@item --no-toc-optimize
7608PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7609entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7610reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7611marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7612marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7613relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7614unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7615reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7616discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7617reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7618code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7619optimization.
7620
7621@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7622@kindex --no-multi-toc
7623@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7624If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7625@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7626where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7627entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7628total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7629grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7630TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7631calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7632help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
763364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7634Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7635
7636@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7637@kindex --no-toc-sort
7638@item --no-toc-sort
7639By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7640happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7641placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7642with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7643referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7644@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7645results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7646off this feature.
7647
7648@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7649@kindex --plt-align
7650@kindex --no-plt-align
7651@item --plt-align
7652@itemx --no-plt-align
7653Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7654aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7655boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7656specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7657specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7658if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7659PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7660
7661@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7662@kindex --plt-static-chain
7663@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7664@item --plt-static-chain
7665@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7666Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7667chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7668chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7669
7670@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7671@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7672@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7673@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7674@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7675With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7676lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7677another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7678order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7679memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7680barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7681looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7682seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7683default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7684
7685@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7686@kindex --plt-localentry
7687@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7688@item --plt-localentry
7689@itemx --no-localentry
7690ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7691ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7692(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7693Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7694or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7695functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7696in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7697interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7698including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7699to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7700complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7701care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7702@end table
7703
7704@ifclear GENERIC
7705@lowersections
7706@end ifclear
7707@end ifset
7708
b4cbbe8f
AK
7709@ifset S/390
7710@ifclear GENERIC
7711@raisesections
7712@end ifclear
7713
7714@node S/390 ELF
7715@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7716
7717@cindex S/390 ELF options
7718@table @option
7719
7720@cindex S/390
7721@kindex --s390-pgste
7722@item --s390-pgste
7723This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7724segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7725binaries marked that way.
7726@end table
7727
7728@ifclear GENERIC
7729@lowersections
7730@end ifclear
7731@end ifset
7732
49fa1e15
AM
7733@ifset SPU
7734@ifclear GENERIC
7735@raisesections
7736@end ifclear
7737
7738@node SPU ELF
7739@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7740
7741@cindex SPU ELF options
7742@table @option
7743
7744@cindex SPU plugins
7745@kindex --plugin
7746@item --plugin
7747This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7748
7749@cindex SPU overlays
7750@kindex --no-overlays
7751@item --no-overlays
7752Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7753regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7754@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7755turns off all this special overlay handling.
7756
7757@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7758@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7759@item --emit-stub-syms
7760This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7761symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7762
7763@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7764@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7765@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7766This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7767function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7768on calls to non-overlay regions.
7769
7770@cindex SPU local store size
7771@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7772@item --local-store=lo:hi
7773@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7774the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7775range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7776
c0065db7 7777@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7778@kindex --stack-analysis
7779@item --stack-analysis
7780SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7781unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7782under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7783@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7784@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7785determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7786for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7787for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7788for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7789find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7790and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7791under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7792dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7793is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7794and calls will be given.
7795
c0065db7 7796@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7797@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7798@item --emit-stack-syms
7799This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7800in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7801These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7802functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7803functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7804such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7805The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7806@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7807@end table
7808
7809@ifclear GENERIC
7810@lowersections
7811@end ifclear
7812@end ifset
7813
36f63dca
NC
7814@ifset TICOFF
7815@ifclear GENERIC
7816@raisesections
7817@end ifclear
7818
7819@node TI COFF
7820@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7821@cindex TI COFF versions
7822@kindex --format=@var{version}
7823The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7824TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7825also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7826format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7827header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7828
7829@ifclear GENERIC
7830@lowersections
7831@end ifclear
7832@end ifset
7833
2ca22b03
NC
7834@ifset WIN32
7835@ifclear GENERIC
7836@raisesections
7837@end ifclear
7838
7839@node WIN32
7840@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7841
c0065db7 7842This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7843See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7844command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7845
7846@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7847@cindex import libraries
7848@item import libraries
69da35b5 7849The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7850libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7851regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7852archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7853support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7854@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7855
c0065db7
RM
7856@item exporting DLL symbols
7857@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7858The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7859
7860@table @emph
7861@item using auto-export functionality
7862@cindex using auto-export functionality
7863By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7864which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7865
0a5d968e
NC
7866@itemize
7867@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7868@item --exclude-symbols
7869@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7870@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7871@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7872@end itemize
7873
09e2aba4
DK
7874When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7875(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7876symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7877often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7878private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7879options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7880exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7881final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7882
7883If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7884command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7885if either of the following are true:
7886
7887@itemize
7888@item A DEF file is used.
7889@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7890@end itemize
dc8465bf 7891
c0065db7
RM
7892@item using a DEF file
7893@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7894Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7895an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7896exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7897name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7898command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7899
7900@example
7901gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7902@end example
7903
0a5d968e
NC
7904Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7905@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7906
dc8465bf
NC
7907Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7908
7909@example
4b5bd4e7 7910LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7911
7912EXPORTS
7913foo
7914bar
7915_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7916another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7917var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7918doo = foo == foo2
7919eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7920@end example
dc8465bf 7921
7fcab871 7922This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7923symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7924alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7925by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7926@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7927@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7928export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7929in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7930symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7931
6b31ad16
DS
7932The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7933name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7934the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7935
b45619c0
NC
7936When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7937library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7938@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7939executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7940
7941With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7942specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7943non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7944
7945If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7946or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7947filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7948
4b5bd4e7
DS
7949The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7950
7951@example
7952EXPORTS
7953 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7954 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7955 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7956@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7957
7958Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7959@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7960@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7961@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7962Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7963@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7964string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7965
7966The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7967
7968@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7969will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7970by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7971linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7972library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7973
7974@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7975The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7976the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7977@code{*_imp__foo}).
7978
7979@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7980well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7981read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7982variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7983the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7984extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7985application will behave unexpectedly.
7986
7987@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7988it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7989symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7990API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7991the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7992
4b5bd4e7
DS
7993See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7994other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7995
7996@cindex creating a DEF file
7997While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7998with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7999
8000@item Using decorations
8001@cindex Using decorations
8002Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8003itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8004declared as:
8005
8006@example
8007__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8008__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8009@end example
8010
8011All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8012any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8013this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8014the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8015
8016Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8017decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8018instead:
8019
8020@example
8021__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8022__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8023@end example
8024
c0065db7
RM
8025This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8026when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8027variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8028code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8029of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8030omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8031@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8032information.
c0065db7 8033@end table
dc8465bf 8034
2ca22b03
NC
8035@cindex automatic data imports
8036@item automatic data imports
8037The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8038by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8039compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8040issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8041code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8042c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8043initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8044decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8045platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8046command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8047The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8048suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8049trigger the feature's use.
8050
c0065db7 8051auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8052additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8053
c0065db7 8054"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8055documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8056
c0065db7
RM
8057The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8058occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8059One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8060below.
8061
8062@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8063For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8064object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8065offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8066field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8067in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8068without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8069The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8070references.
8071
c0065db7
RM
8072The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8073be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8074themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8075runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8076compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8077support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8078run without error on an older system.
8079
c0065db7
RM
8080@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8081enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8082
8083@cindex direct linking to a dll
8084@item direct linking to a dll
8085The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8086including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8087libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8088traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8089libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8090function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8091though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8092storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8093tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8094large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8095
c0065db7 8096Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8097@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8098of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8099perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8100select the dll instead of an import library.
8101
2ca22b03 8102
69da35b5
NC
8103For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8104to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8105
8106@example
45e948fe
NC
8107libxxx.dll.a
8108xxx.dll.a
8109libxxx.a
8110xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8111libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8112cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8113libxxx.dll
8114xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8115@end example
8116
69da35b5
NC
8117before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8118
c0065db7
RM
8119(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8120where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8121@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8122file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8123@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8124
c0065db7
RM
8125Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8126@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8127was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8128various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8129could coexist on the same machine.
8130
2ca22b03
NC
8131The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8132applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8133libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8134
8135@example
8136bin/
8137 cygxxx.dll
8138lib/
8139 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8140 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8141@end example
8142
c0065db7
RM
8143Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8144done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8145
81461. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8147@example
8148gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8149@end example
2ca22b03 8150
69da35b5
NC
8151However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8152(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8153@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8154not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8155
2ca22b03
NC
81562. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8157directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8158should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8159making the app/dll.
8160
8161@example
8162ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8163@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8164
8165Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8166
8167@example
8168gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8169@end example
69da35b5
NC
8170
8171This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8172perfectly legal
8173
8174@example
8175bin/
8176 cygxxx-5.dll
8177lib/
c0065db7 8178 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8179@end example
8180
dc8465bf 8181Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8182even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8183@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8184
8185Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8186wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8187
81881. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8189work with auto-imported data.
8190
dc8465bf
NC
81912. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8192import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8193symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8194for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8195possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8196
45e948fe
NC
81973. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8198critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8199in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8200stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8201
69da35b5 8202So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8203true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8204a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8205binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8206massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8207requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8208will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8209
c0065db7 8210@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8211@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8212@item adding additional names
8213Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8214A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8215exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8216when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8217import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8218
c0065db7 8219@example
dc8465bf
NC
8220LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8221
8222EXPORTS
c0065db7 8223foo
dc8465bf 8224_foo = foo
c0065db7 8225@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8226
8227The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8228
8229Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8230source code using the "weak" attribute:
8231
c0065db7
RM
8232@example
8233void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8234void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8235@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8236
8237See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8238symbols.
8239
8240@item renaming symbols
8241Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8242kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8243@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8244DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8245created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8246
c0065db7 8247@example
dc8465bf
NC
8248LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8249
8250EXPORTS
8251_foo = foo
c0065db7 8252@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8253
8254The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8255@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8256@end table
dc8465bf 8257
0a5d968e 8258Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8259unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8260If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8261@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8262that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8263@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8264renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8265to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8266the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8267In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8268which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8269
8270@cindex weak externals
8271@item weak externals
8272The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8273weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8274defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8275are three variants of weak externals:
8276@itemize
8277@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8278called lazy externals.
8279@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8280This form is not presently implemented.
8281@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8282implemented.
8283@end itemize
8284As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8285are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8286uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8287
8288@cindex aligned common symbols
8289@item aligned common symbols
8290As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8291desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8292the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8293carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8294by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8295tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8296but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8297warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8298
2ca22b03
NC
8299@end table
8300
8301@ifclear GENERIC
8302@lowersections
8303@end ifclear
8304@end ifset
8305
e0001a05
NC
8306@ifset XTENSA
8307@ifclear GENERIC
8308@raisesections
8309@end ifclear
8310
8311@node Xtensa
8312@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8313
8314@cindex Xtensa processors
8315The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8316@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8317specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8318keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8319example, with the command:
8320
8321@smallexample
8322SECTIONS
8323@{
8324 .text : @{
8325 *(.literal .text)
8326 @}
8327@}
8328@end smallexample
8329
8330@noindent
8331@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8332and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8333literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8334interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8335group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8336files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8337and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8338
43cd72b9 8339@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8340@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8341Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8342provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8343is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8344literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8345will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8346location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8347the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8348unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8349@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8350range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8351
8352For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8353to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8354instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8355instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8356instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8357@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8358hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8359By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8360switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8361density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8362instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8363performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8364linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8365a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8366
8367The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8368control the linker:
8369
8370@cindex Xtensa options
8371@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8372@item --size-opt
8373When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8374more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8375no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8376alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8377preserve the correctness of the code.
8378@end table
e0001a05
NC
8379
8380@ifclear GENERIC
8381@lowersections
8382@end ifclear
8383@end ifset
8384
252b5132
RH
8385@ifclear SingleFormat
8386@node BFD
8387@chapter BFD
8388
8389@cindex back end
8390@cindex object file management
8391@cindex object formats available
8392@kindex objdump -i
8393The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8394These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8395object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8396format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8397it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8398associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8399object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8400(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8401list all the formats available for your configuration.
8402
8403@cindex BFD requirements
8404@cindex requirements for BFD
8405As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8406several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8407BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8408formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8409been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8410BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8411may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8412
8413One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8414mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8415useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8416conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8417
8418@menu
8419* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8420@end menu
8421
8422@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8423@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8424@cindex opening object files
8425@include bfdsumm.texi
8426@end ifclear
8427
8428@node Reporting Bugs
8429@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8430@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8431@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8432
ff5dcc92 8433Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8434
8435Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8436it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8437to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8438work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8439@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8440
8441In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8442information that enables us to fix the bug.
8443
8444@menu
8445* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8446* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8447@end menu
8448
8449@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8450@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8451@cindex bug criteria
8452
8453If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8454
8455@itemize @bullet
8456@cindex fatal signal
8457@cindex linker crash
8458@cindex crash of linker
8459@item
8460If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8461@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8462
8463@cindex error on valid input
8464@item
ff5dcc92 8465If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8466
8467@cindex invalid input
8468@item
ff5dcc92 8469If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8470may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8471object files are correct.
8472
8473@item
8474If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8475improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8476@end itemize
8477
8478@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8479@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8480@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8481@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8482
8483A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8484products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8485recommend you contact that organization first.
8486
8487You can find contact information for many support companies and
8488individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8489distribution.
8490
ad22bfe8 8491@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8492Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8493@value{BUGURL}.
8494@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8495
8496The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8497@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8498fact or leave it out, state it!
8499
8500Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8501problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8502assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8503matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8504the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8505location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8506were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8507into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8508specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8509and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8510
8511Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8512the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8513on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8514
8515Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8516bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8517respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8518You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8519
8520To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8521
8522@itemize @bullet
8523@item
ff5dcc92 8524The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8525the @samp{--version} argument.
8526
8527Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8528the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8529
8530@item
ff5dcc92 8531Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8532patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8533
8534@item
8535The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8536version number.
8537
8538@item
ff5dcc92 8539What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8540``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8541
8542@item
8543The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8544observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8545list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8546sufficient.
8547
8548If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8549and then we might not encounter the bug.
8550
8551@item
8552A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8553bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8554provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8555bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8556state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8557requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8558we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8559attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8560
8561If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8562@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8563object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8564@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8565how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8566
8567@item
8568A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8569incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8570
ff5dcc92 8571Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8572will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8573not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8574a chance to make a mistake.
8575
8576Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8577say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8578copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8579C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8580and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8581fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8582you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8583any conclusion from our observations.
8584
8585@item
ff5dcc92 8586If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8587diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8588@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8589If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8590context, not by line number.
8591
8592The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8593sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8594@end itemize
8595
8596Here are some things that are not necessary:
8597
8598@itemize @bullet
8599@item
8600A description of the envelope of the bug.
8601
8602Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8603which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8604changes will not affect it.
8605
8606This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8607will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8608with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8609We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8610
8611Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8612of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8613output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8614less time, and so on.
8615
8616However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8617report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8618
8619@item
8620A patch for the bug.
8621
8622A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8623the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8624a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8625to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8626
ff5dcc92 8627Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8628construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8629through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8630able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8631fixed.
8632
8633And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8634patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8635help us to understand.
8636
8637@item
8638A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8639
8640Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8641things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8642@end itemize
8643
8644@node MRI
8645@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8646@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8647To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8648linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8649alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8650described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8651simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8652@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8653linker commands; these commands are described here.
8654
8655In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8656file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8657features to make use of them.
8658
8659You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8660@samp{-c} command-line option.
8661
8662Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8663command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8664blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8665MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8666issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8667
8668Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8669
8670You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8671lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8672The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8673
8674@table @code
8675@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8676@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8677@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8678Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8679the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8680@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8681your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8682script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8683commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8684input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8685@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8686
8687@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8688@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8689Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8690in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8691
8692@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8693
8694@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8695@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8696Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8697@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8698
8699@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8700@item BASE @var{expression}
8701Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8702absolute addresses) in the output file.
8703
8704@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8705@item CHIP @var{expression}
8706@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8707This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8708
8709@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8710@item END
8711This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8712
8713@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8714@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8715Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8716language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8717
8718@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8719@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8720Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8721@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8722
8723The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8724same line, with no change in its effect.
8725
8726@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8727@item LOAD @var{filename}
8728@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8729Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8730same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8731command line.
8732
8733@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8734@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8735@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8736MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8737option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8738
8739@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8740@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8741@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8742Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8743order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8744script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8745sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8746file, in the order specified.
8747
8748@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8749@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8750@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8751@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8752Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8753@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8754
8755@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8756@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8757@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8758@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8759You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8760specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8761If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8762@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8763@end table
8764
793c5807
NC
8765@node GNU Free Documentation License
8766@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8767@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8768
370b66a1
CD
8769@node LD Index
8770@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8771
8772@printindex cp
8773
8774@tex
7ca01ed9 8775% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8776% meantime:
8777\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8778\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8779\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8780\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8781\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8782\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8783\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8784\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8785\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8786% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8787@end tex
8788
252b5132 8789@bye
This page took 1.765553 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.